2015 Chrysler 200 Owner's Manual

User Manual: 2015-200

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 698

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2015 200

200

2015
OWNER’S MANUAL

Chrysler Group LLC
15UF-126-AC

Third Edition Rev 1

Printed in U.S.A.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4 INTRODUCTION

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfacLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
tion.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INTRODUCTION 5

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped under the right front seat
and printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure
Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle
registration and title.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle Identification Number

INTRODUCTION 7

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.

Stamped VIN Location

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2

CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15

▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .20

䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .18

▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .25

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .27

▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . .47
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .60

▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .108
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System) has four operating positions, three of which are labeled and will
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF,
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START,
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
during start RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa- method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
tion).
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
push to operate the ignition switch.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.

Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System)

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.

1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob

Emergency Key Removal

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

Ignition Or Accessory On Message

WARNING!

Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.

The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node
(KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if the engine controller does not receive the
proper authorization codes from the body control module.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.

Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.

• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.

Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
is one that has never been programmed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys- NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
performed at an authorized dealer.
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm, the
General Information
Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following auThe Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 dible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the headand with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is lights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the
subject to the following conditions:
Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Rearming Of The System
• This device must accept any interference that may be If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
received, including interference that may cause unde- disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
sired operation.
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

To Arm The System

To Disarm The System

Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:

The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:

1. Make sure the vehicle ignition is cycled to the ⬙OFF⬙
position. (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting • Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
And Operating⬙ for further information).
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle: • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in ⬙Things
• Push the LOCK button on the interior power door
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
lock switch panel with the driver and/or passenger
information).
door open.
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob (RKE) available in
the same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-NNOTE:
Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the Trunk button
Vehicle⬙ for further information).
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
Vehicle Security Alarm.
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters
the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the
alarm will sound.

If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior Tamper Alert
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Security System Manual Override
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, doors using the manual door lock.
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

Manual Door Lock Switch

The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.

Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
(IGNM)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Undertransmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter

To Unlock The Doors

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Instrument Panel” for further information.
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles To Unlatch The Trunk
equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
To Lock The Doors
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under “Things To Know Before
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
Using The Panic Alarm
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
Sound Horn With Lock
and the interior lights will turn on.
Headlight Illumination On Approach

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless Programming Additional Transmitters
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph performed at an authorized dealer.
(24 km/h) or greater.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
NOTE:
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
• The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition battery.
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights NOTE:
and horn will remain on.
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
housing or the printed circuit board.
by the system.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Emergency Key Removal

Separating The RKE Transmitter Case

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade 3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
the seal during removal.
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it distance, check for these two conditions:
with rubbing alcohol.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
General Information
radios.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This system uses the Key Fob with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system has
a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)

NOTE:

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic •
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•
• Low fuel indicator must not be illuminated.
•
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
•
reduce this range.
•
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed

Battery at an acceptable charge level
RKE panic button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote start event
Vehicle security alarm not active
Ignition in OFF position

WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.

• Trunk closed

(Continued)

• Hazard switch off
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low

WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Messages on Your Instrument
Cluster - 3.5ⴖ Electronic Vehicle Information
Cluster (EVIC) and 7ⴖ Driver Information Display
(DID)
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open

• Remote Start Disabled — Start To Reset
• Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
• Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The instrument cluster message stays active until the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
Start request.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Remote Start mode.
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, press and release the
For security, power window and power sunroof op- UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
in the Remote Start mode.
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two press and release the START/STOP button (vehicles
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before NOTE: The message ⬙Remote Start Active Push Start
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
Button⬙ (vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™)

NOTE:
•
•
•

•

To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle

will display in the instrument cluster until you push the
START button.

Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the
rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red
indicator is visible.

Manual Door Lock Switch

If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the trunk.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.

(Continued)

Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on each of the front
door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the
doors and trunk.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

If you press the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in
the vehicle. Placing the ignition in the OFF position or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
Power Door Lock Switches

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit

Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with Doors
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
power door locks if:
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have a Child1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enProtection Door Lock system.
abled.
The Child-Protection Door Locks are located inside the
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to rear edge of the door.
0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission shift lever is
1. Open the rear door.
placed in PARK.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or similar flatbladed object into the lock and rotate clockwise approximately one-quarter turn to the lock position or
counter clockwise to the unlock position (as indicated
by the stamped icons).

3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming

To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

Lock Child Protection Door Lock

Unlock Child Protection Door Lock

WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
pull the toggle lock by the door handle (UNLOCKED
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower reposition), roll down the window, and open the door with
sponse time.
the outside door handle.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
NOTE:
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
door is unlocked.
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

To Unlock From The Passenger Side — If Equipped
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
All Doors” or “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver
Door.”)
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

NOTE: If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks All Doors” is
programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of
the drivers door handle. To select between “1st Press Of Key
Fob Unlocks All Doors” and “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
Driver Door”, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the
doors are locked using the door panel switch, a valid
Transmitter In Vehicle
Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
• The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter.
is in the OFF position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).

• The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the
Passive Entry door handles.
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the decklid, push the button located on the
light bar between the license plate lamps.

NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
decklid, the decklid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
decklid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors

Press The Door Handle Button To Lock

With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.

Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.

Power Window Controls
1 — Window Lockout Switch
2 — Rear Passenger Window Controls
3 — Driver/Passenger Window Controls

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.

WARNING! (Continued)
location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The Driver One Touch Down
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
The driver door power window switch has an auto down
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infeature. Push the window switch to the second detent
formation.
and release, and the window will go down automatically.

WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a

To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

NOTE:

Front Windows Express Up And Down — If
Equipped

• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
Press the switch to the second detent and release. The
switch again to close the window.
window will go down automatically.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
Manual Down
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoPress and hold the switch to the first detent and release
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
when you want the window to stop.
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
Express Down

Express Up
Lift the switch to the second detent and release. The
window will go up automatically.
Manual Up

WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.

Lift the switch to the first detent and release when you
want the window to stop.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

the DOWN position). To enable the window controls,
press and release the window lockout button again
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
(setting it in the UP position).
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
Wind Buffeting
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurdetent to open the window completely and continue rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
after the window is fully open.
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunWindow Lockout Switch
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
press and release the window lockout button (setting it in
Reset Auto-Up

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE

NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds or by using
the external release switch located on the underside of
the decklid overhang. The release feature will function
only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition.
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The EVIC/DID display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.

Trunk Release Button

With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.

The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in this section for more
information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
feature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-inthe-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.

TRUNK SAFETY WARNING

WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Trunk Emergency Release

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
Some of the most important safety features in your
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
vehicle are the restraint systems:
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints.”)
• Seat Belt Systems
3. If you will be carrying children too small for adult• Supplemental Restraints System (SRS) Air Bags
sized seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) feature can be used
• Child Restraints
to attach child restraints. For more information on
Important Safety Precautions:
LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH).
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system 4. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
seat belt properly (Refer to “Child Restraints”) should
possible.
be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
5. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
them or under their arm.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS SYSTEMS

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

6. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
7. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
8. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.

9. Do not lean against the door or window. If your Seat Belt Systems
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
between you and the door and you could be injured. on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
10. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be happen far away from home or on your own street.
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occube belted at all times.
pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than
(BeltAlert®)
5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the visual notification.
driver and outboard front passenger (if equipped with
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not
outboard front passenger BeltAlert®) to buckle their
active when the outboard front passenger seat is unocseat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition
cupied. BeltAlert® may be triggered when an animal or
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or
driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted,
when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recomthe Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
mended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if
on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are seThe BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle cured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
BeltAlert® can be activated or deactivated by your auReminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
thorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recomOnce the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
mend deactivating BeltAlert®.
duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unbuckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

Positioning The Lap Belt

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortslack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
shoulder belt.
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Anchorage
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.

Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.

NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.

• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.

Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a

WARNING!

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
worn snugly and positioned properly.
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretenPregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take Energy Management Feature
the force if there is a collision.
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing manner.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
•
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you
will hear a ratcheting sound as the seat belt retracts.
Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and
then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic
Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this
feature. Children 12 years old and under should always
be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.

WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.

WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

• Knee Impact Bolsters

Advanced Front Air Bags

• Advanced Front Air Bags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air Bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words
SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.

• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretenioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster / Supplemental Passenger
Knee Air Bag
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster / Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
Advanced Front Air Bags.
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
sensors or other system components.
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
determined by the OCS.
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features

This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Advanced Front Air Bag Operation

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.

Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, Passenger Seat
away from an inflating air bag.
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad- this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large vanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occuquantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the pant’s seated weight, as determined by the OCS.
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
• Air Bag Warning Light

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor

• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or

The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is lo- • The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pascated beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
senger, including a child; or
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front paschild restraint; or
senger’s most probable classification. The OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may • The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In
Front Passenger Seat OcFront Passenger Air
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
cupant Status
Bag Output
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
Rear-facing child restraint
Reduced-power deployment
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Reduced-power deAdvanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the Child, including a child in
ployment OR Fullinflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat*
power deployment
the OCS estimates that:

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status
Properly seated adult

Unoccupied seat

Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power deployment
Reduced-power deployment

* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front pas- The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on
senger seat.
the front passenger seat and where that weight is located.
The OCS communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation
rate should be adjusted.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably on or near the floor
• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult, front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly. front passenger seat may result in a full-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly • The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrupositioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
ment panel).
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deterLighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)

mines the most probable classification of the occupant • The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
that it detects.
to face the rear of the vehicle.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or • The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
position.
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a
collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working • The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.)
improperly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Not Seated Properly

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

Not Seated Properly

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Not Seated Properly

• If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

WARNING! (Continued)
• Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the
floor under the front passenger seat.

classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed.
Do not make any modifications to the front passenger
seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the
seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only Chrysler
Group LLC approved seat accessories may be used.

in the instrument panel
The Air Bag Warning Light
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS • Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or • Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by Chrysler Group LLC for
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
the specific model being repaired. Always use the
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS com- • Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
ponents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.

Knee Impact Bolsters

• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC .

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.

WARNING!

Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced
Front Air Bags.

Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
SABs are marked with a SRS AIRBAG label sewn into seat belts and body structure.
the outboard side of the seats.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure you
if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SABs; the performance could be
adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed
into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
Label Location
covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG.
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front
and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce
the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77

rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.

WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.

deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.

NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
Rollover Events
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
Side Impacts
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is approdetermining the appropriate response to impact events. priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

event may be in progress and whether deployment is If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the or all of the following may occur:
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretenand/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
sioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fricthe vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
experiences a near rollover event.
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
If A Deployment Occurs
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
the air bag system.
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
immediately after deployment.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s inauthorized dealer immediately.
structions for cleaning.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- In the event of an impact, if the communication network
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
bags will not be in place to protect you.
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position.

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
• Unlock the doors automatically.
but they will open during air bag deployment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
OFF.
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
Air Bag Warning Light
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malin a collision. The Occupant Restraint Control- function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
ler (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
interconnecting wiring associated with air bag single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
system electrical components.
again after initial startup.
System Reset Procedure

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.

WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protecWarning Light will illuminate on the instrution. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag ment panel.
system immediately.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The Redundant Warning Light will stay on until the fault Maintaining Your Air Bag System
is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert
you that the Redundant Warning Light has come on and
WARNING!
a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Warning
Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driv- • Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
ing have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immebe injured if the air bag system is not there to
diately.
protect you. Do not modify the components or
For additional information regarding the Redundant
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
Warning Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
this manual.
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a times, including babies and children.
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- province, requires that small children ride in proper
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosare recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- ecuted for ignoring it.
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
crash investigation.
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is the rear seats rather than in the front.
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
WARNING!
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
vehicle or the EDR.
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87

WARNING! (Continued)
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:

• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
or call 1–866–SEATCHECK (732–8243). Canadian resichildren from newborn size to the child almost large
dents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
additional information:
Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat
for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc- • www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverstions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual
childsafety-index-53.htm
and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Infants and Toddlers

Small Children

Larger Children

Children Too Large for
Child Restraints

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old
or who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

Infants And Child Restraints

WARNING!

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91

WARNING! (Continued)
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt
out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or
neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or
use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.

WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type

Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint

Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X

X
X

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle

•
•

Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?

Yes

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH anchorage system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
You can install child restraints with flexible
lower anchors in the center position. The
inner anchorages are 17.7 inches (450 mm)
apart. Do not install child restraints with
rigid lower anchors in the center position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97

Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?

Yes

Can the head restraints be removed?

Yes

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
All head restraints may be removed

98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99

Locating The LATCH Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.

Tether Strap Anchorages

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH

WARNING! (Continued)
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCHCompatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.

Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in the center seating position. Only install this type
of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child Always follow the directions of the child restraint
restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach- manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
ments can be installed in any rear seating position.
here.

WARNING!

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCHcompatible child restraints next to each other, you
must use the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s

1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101

2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacthe hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
turer’s instructions.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
in any direction.
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt:
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
to allow more room for the child seat.
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
ing position.
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
tions to attach a tether anchor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.

WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Weight limit of the Child Restraint

Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the
seat belt path of the child restraint?

Yes

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
All head restraints may be removed.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retractor.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint.
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
against the child seat.
tether anchor.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click”.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt
restraint.
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
Anchorage
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
1. Look behind the seating position where you
side of the head restraint.
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107

5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.

Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap

A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor

4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriAn unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
mental and should be avoided.
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your VeA long break-in period is not required for the engine and
hicle”.
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Transporting Pets

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109

NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.

WARNING! (Continued)
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust Gas

WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111

not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.

Defroster

Air Bag Warning Light

unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperFront seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
able.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Floor Mat Safety Information
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area

The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.

• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle

Door Latches

Tires

Fluid Leaks

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.

Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.

Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .132

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .122

▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .132

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .123 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .133
. . . . .139
. . . . .140
. . . . .141

▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .147

▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .160

▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . .149

▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .153
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .157
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .163
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .170

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

▫ Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .173

䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .175
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .176
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .185
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .186
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .192
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .197
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .199
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .202
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .213
▫ FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF. . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .247

▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .247

▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .228 䡵 PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense® Active
Park Assist System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .230
Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
䡵 PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK
▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .245

▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278

▫ Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .246

▫ Sunglass Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .281

▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .292

▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . .282

▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .283

▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .285

▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .286

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288

▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288

▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 䡵 POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .290
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

—
. . . .294
. . . .295
. . . .296
. . . .296
. . . .296

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304

▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . .297 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . .297

▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305

▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .297

▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .297

▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309

▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298

▫ Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped . . . .310

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299

▫ Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
▫ Grocery Bag Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ Ski Pass-Through. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313

䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .302 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303

▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314

▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

• Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature Off.
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
On or Off through the touchscreen.
a 9-1-1 button.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the
feature On.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The ASSIST and 9–1–1 features operate through • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only
vehicle issues.
operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is 9-1-1 Call
active. Refer to your “Uconnect® System supplement
1. Press the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
manual” for further information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:

NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, press the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.

• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just press the Assist button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via
Mobile features.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:

NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to
determine if additional help is needed. Once the 9-1-1
operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s 9-1-1
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you
• The vehicle brand.
or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in
the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator operator terminates the connection.
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
additional help is needed.
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.

• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

WARNING! (Continued)
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:

• The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
• The Phone Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phone
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”

WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.

WARNING! (Continued)
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working
properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to
send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the ORC system immediately.

• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals
are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.

• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
• Wireless network congestion.
beyond Chrysler Group LLC’s control may prevent or
stop the 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but • Weather.
are not limited to, the following factors:
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
• The ignition key has been removed from the ignition
and the delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition key is in OFF position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless
and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal
reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.

Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.

WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The third LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which
turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
LED shines downward to illuminate the ground adjacent
three detent positions:
to the Front and Rear Doors.
• Full forward position
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30
seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
• Full rearward position
ignition is placed into the RUN position.
• Normal position
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
shift lever is moved out of the PARK position.
Lighting — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
and puddle lamp contain three LEDs.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature

Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
Two of the LED’s are used as turn signal indicators,
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in
rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will move
the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard
slightly downward from the present position when the
Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs.
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the drivers door
trim panel.

Power Mirror Control

The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
the mirror that you want to adjust.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
move.
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automatiHeated Mirrors — If Equipped
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.

2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.

Rear Detection Zones

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or
higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
BSM Warning Light
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
width on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and
extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the contamination so that the BSM system can function
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where Entering From The Side
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumVehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
side of the vehicle.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.

Side Monitoring

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Entering From The Rear

Overtaking Traffic

Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.

Rear Monitoring

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

Overtaking/Approaching

Overtaking/Passing

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Stationary Objects

Opposing Traffic

WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.

Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

RCP Detection Zones

RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.

Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
WARNING!
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a the system will respond with both visual and audible
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back- When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE:

Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.

• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
General Information
system, the radio is also muted.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
the appropriate visual alert only.
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the 1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
RCP state always requests the chime.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
SEATS

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the Power Seats — If Equipped
vehicle.
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s
seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
WARNING!
side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or seat up, down, forward or rearward.
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.

Power Seat Switch

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.

The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward, the
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Power Seat Recliner Switch

Vehicles equipped with power drivers seat may be
equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch
is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push
the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease
the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

Power Lumbar Switch

Front Seat Adjustment

While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Seats — If Equipped

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.

Recline Lever

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped

Front Heated Seats — If Equipped

The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by The front heated seats control buttons are located within
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
once to turn the High
• Press the heated seat button
setting ON.

Seat Height Adjustment

• Press the heated seat button
the Low setting ON.

a second time to turn

• Press the heated seat button
the heating elements OFF.

a third time to turn

When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the
air from the passenger compartment and blow air
through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HIGH and
LOW.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
HIGH.
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LOW.
• Press the ventilated seat button
turn the ventilated seat OFF.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Head Restraints

once to choose Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
a second time to impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
a third time to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.

Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal position
following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not return to their
normal position see your authorized dealer immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Push Button

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.

WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.

Rear Head Restraints
The rear outboard head restraints have three positions
UP, MID and DOWN. The center head restraint has only
two positions, Up and Down. When the center seat is
being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised
position. When there are no occupants in the center seat
the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility
for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull on the loops to fold down either
or both seatbacks.

Push Button

Rear Seat Release Loops

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

When returning the rear seatback to the upright position, DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
be sure the seatback is latched.
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory
WARNING!
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into desired radio station presets.
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The rear cargo area of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children.
They could be seriously injured in a collision.
Children should be seated and using the proper
restraint system.

The memory switch is located on the driver’s side door
panel. The switch contains 3 buttons, a S (SET) button to
activate the memory save function, the number (1)
memory button and the number (2) memory button. The
memory switch allows the driver to recall either of the
two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
appropriate number button on the switch.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then press the number (1) button within five
seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), will
display which memory position is being set.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into
memory as follows:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).

Driver Memory Switch

Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:

3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then press the number (2) button within five
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
seconds. The EVIC/DID will display which memory
existing profile from memory.
position is being set.
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings ”
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
memory profile.
information.
• To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer To program your RKE transmitters, perform the followto “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry ing:
Transmitter To Memory” in this section.
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
Transmitter To Memory
NOTE:

Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can be 3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed
switch, then within five seconds press and release the
button labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. “Memory Profile
memory profiles with a press of the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter.
Set” (1 or 2) will display in the EVIC/DID.
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter within 10 seconds.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your recall is cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A
memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button, and delay of one second will occur before another recall can
within 10 seconds, followed by pressing the UNLOCK be selected.
button on the RKE transmitter.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
Memory Position Recall
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not vehicle.
in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC/DID.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the
MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
• When you cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60
MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on
mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
you cycle the vehicles ignition to the ACC or RUN
MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm) To open the hood, two levers must be released.
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit 1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
or Easy Entry.

Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.

Hood Release Lever

2. Move to the front of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Safety Latch Lever Location

Safety Latch Lever

3. Reach under the center front edge of the hood and 4. Lift the hood upward to the open position.
push and hold the safety latch lever to the right.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

LIGHTS

CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.

WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.

Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights — if equipped, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
lights — if equipped.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for
automatic headlight operation. When the system is on,
the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means
the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you
place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the
automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of
the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.

Headlight Switch

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by delay.
this feature.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)

NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turn off in the normal manner.
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to NOTE:
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for • The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
further information.
feature.
Headlight Time Delay
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
vehicle in an unlit area.
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.

Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:

If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.

2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
ment Panel” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instruoperation of low beams).
ment Panel” for further information.
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
Lights-On Reminder
reactivate the system.
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
The Daytime Running Lights come on whenever the the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
engine is running, and the transmission is not in the
PARK position. The lights will remain on until the
ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be
used for normal nighttime driving.
To Deactivate

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
headlight switch.
switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
Fog Lights — If Equipped

NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.

Fog Light Switch

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

Multifunction Lever

Turn Signals

The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
steering column.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved,
it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC/DID
and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.

Multifunction Lever

• When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will
turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn
signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will
turn back on when the turn signal is turned off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lane Change Assist

Front Map/Reading Lights

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overthe detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash head console.
three times then automatically turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Center Buttons
High/Low Beam Switch
There are two map/reading light buttons located in the
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch center of the overhead console that allow the lights to
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever operate independently.
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. Press the button once to turn the light on.
Flash-To-Pass
To turn the light off, press the button a second time.
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

Front Map/Reading Lights Center Buttons

Front Map/Reading Lights Press Lenses

NOTE: The lights also turn on when a door is opened.
The two map/reading lights can be operated indepen- The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on
the RKE is pressed.
dently by pressing the lenses.
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Press Lenses

Press the lens once to turn the light on.
To turn the light off, press the lens a second time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.

With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument panel lights.

Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the drivers side of the
instrument panel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Instrument Panel Dimmer

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

Ambient Light Control — If Equipped

Dome Light Position

Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light located in the overhead console, door handle
lights, under I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and
cubby bin lights.

Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.
The interior lights will remain on when the instrument
panel dimmer control is in this position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position. The interior lights will
remain off when the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC/DID, and radio when the
position lights or headlights are on.

Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

NOTE: If snow packing occurs that obstructs the normal
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent operation of the windshield wipers the following mespositions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low sage will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or the Driver Information Display (DID):
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
⬙Front Wipers Blocked Cycle Switch or Clean the Windoperation.
shield⬙. It is important to remove the snow accumulation
to allow the wipers to function normally and to maintain
good visibility of the road.
Windshield Wiper Operation

CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Wiper Operation
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).

Intermittent Wiper Operation

NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

Windshield Washer Operation

If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.

Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever
upward to the Mist position and release for a single
wiping cycle.
Mist Control

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windThis feature senses moisture on the windshield and
shield.
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray • Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
to activate this feature.
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
for further information.
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
following conditions:
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if
the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch • Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
in the OFF position when not using the system.
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
NOTE:
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift
lever/gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.

Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177

To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle up until fully
engaged.

WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
turn the heating element ON.

once to

• Press the heated steering wheel button
time to turn the heating element OFF.

a second

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

WARNING! (Continued)

On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.

• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate

Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME

4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — CANCEL

Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Deactivate

WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
and on level ground before pressing the SET (+) or SET (-) 20 mph (32 km/h).
button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
To Increase Speed
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen To Decrease Speed
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
U.S. Speed (mph)
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
continue to increase until the button is released, then
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
the new set speed will be established.
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
Metric Speed (km/h)

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
the new set speed will be established.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
continue to increase until the button is released, then
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
the new set speed will be established.
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills

WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
vehicle set speed.
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
moderate hills is normal.
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183

ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.

WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
3 minutes the parking brake will be activated,
and the ACC system will be cancelled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).

• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185

NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

— NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
— SET+/ACCEL
— RESUME
— SET-/DECEL
— DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
— ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
— DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
— CANCEL

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive conditions:
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
• When you apply the brakes.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When the parking brake is set.
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE0 mph (0 km/h).
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, • When the brakes are overheated.
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or • When the driver door is open.
Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC/DID displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187

To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC/DID
displays “ACC Ready.”

time, the system will turn off and the EVIC/DID will
display “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Off
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.

WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC/DID.

• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
speed will only be determined by the position of the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The
accelerator pedal.
EVIC/DID will display the set speed.
To Cancel
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to The following conditions cancel the system:
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle • The brake pedal is applied.
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
• The CANCEL button is pressed.
the current speed of the vehicle.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189

• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the To Resume
Drive position.
If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume)
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The EVIC/DID will display the last set speed.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.

NOTE:

• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.

• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the driver will either have to press the
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.

• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
To Turn Off

The system will turn off and clear the set speed in • ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
memory if:
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
is pressed.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pressed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed

U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID.

Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
pressing the SET + button.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will Metric Speed (km/h)
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
in the EVIC/DID.
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
To Decrease Speed
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
pressing the SET - button.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC/DID.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
NOTE:
U.S. Speed (mph)

• When you override and push the SET + button or SET
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
of the vehicle.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
will automatically slow the vehicle.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC/DID.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two
seconds the driver will either have to press the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.

Setting The Following Distance In ACC

The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up distance setting displays in the EVIC/DID.
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193

Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)

Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)

Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)

To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Setting — Increase button and release. Each time the button
is pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195

To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance • The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the
ACC Activation).
button is pressed, the distance setting decreases by one The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; howbar (shorter).
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the necessary.
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
same lane, the EVIC/DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle
ACC system applies the brakes.
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
of the set speed.
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC/DID and a chime will
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
speed.
braking capacity.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a target
vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
turn signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic,
Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left
hand side of the Target vehicles.
When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive
traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC
system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this
condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on
Brake Alert
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the EVIC/DID is a warn- the right side of the Target vehicle. This additional
ing for the driver to take action and does not necessarily acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right
mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is turn signal. In this condition the ACC system will no
longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it
applying the brakes autonomously.
determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location
with left hand drive traffic.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197

While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened,
a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system
will be cancelled.
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
WARNING!
without the need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
will either have to press the RES (resume) button, or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
existing Set Speed.
ACC Operation At Stop

NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
standstill for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the
The EVIC/DID displays the current ACC system setparking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
tings. The EVIC/DID is located in the center of the
be cancelled.
instrument cluster. The information it displays depends
on ACC system status.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
the following displays in the EVIC/DID:
• Distance Setting Change
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• System Cancel
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap• Driver Override
tive Cruise Control Off.”
• System Off
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • ACC Proximity Warning
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise • ACC Unavailable Warning
Control Ready.”
• The EVIC/DID will return to the last display selected
Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
after five seconds of no ACC display activity
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
EVIC/DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199

Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning

vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.

NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as section.
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and
vehicle behind the lower grille.
the system will deactivate.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is imporThe “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
tant to note the following maintenance items:
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so NOTE:
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
require a sensor realignment.
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. • Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an afterDoing so could cause an ACC system failure or
market grille or modifying the grille is not recommalfunction.
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive “Clean Front Windshield” Warning
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
simply reactivating it.
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201

obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the EVIC/DID
will display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance.

When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full functionality.

NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required”or “Cruise/
temporarily occur.
FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
examine the windshield and the camera located on the limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporequire cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
rarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following a key cycle. If the problem persists, see
your authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
NOTE: Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
Offset Driving Condition Example
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
Turns
And
Bends
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203

the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume Using ACC On Hills
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
system functionality.
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.

ACC Hill Example

Turn Or Bend Example
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Lane Changing Example

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205

Narrow Vehicles

Stationary Objects And Vehicles

Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.

ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

General Information

Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency Mode
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- To change between the different control modes, press the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
eration of the device.
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pressing of the
other than an authorized service facility could void
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONauthorization to use this equipment.
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207

WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed

Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pressing the SET +
button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph)
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has • Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
reached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will Metric Speed (km/h)
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
in the EVIC/DID display.
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
To Decrease Speed
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
you can decrease speed by pressing the SET - button.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC/DID display.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

To Cancel

U.S. Speed (mph)

The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
memory:
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• The brake pedal is applied.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • The CANCEL button is pressed.
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sysbutton is released. The decrease in set speed is retem (ESC/TCS) activates.
flected in the EVIC/DID display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209

• The vehicle parking brake is applied.

• The ignition is turned off.

• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over- • The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pressed.
heated).
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
Drive position.
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
To Resume Speed
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button Operation
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
20 mph (32 km/h).
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
visual warnings (within the EVIC/DID), and may apply
To Turn Off
a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are
memory if:
intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
ON/OFF button is pressed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.

the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for
two seconds and then release the brakes.

If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system
may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

FCW Message

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211

When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.

be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.

WARNING!

NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.

Turning FCW ON Or OFF
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If The forward collision button is located on the switch
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should panel below the Uconnect® display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON (LED turns
off).
• Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
• Changing the FCW sensitivity - Near vs. Far. Far warns
the driver of a possible collision earlier and Near
warns the driver later.
• Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking, or
Forward Collision Button
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213

NOTE:

Changing FCW And Active Braking Status

The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are • The system will retain the last setting selected by the
programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to
driver after ignition shut down.
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
ment Panel” for further information.
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
path of the car, stationary objects that are far away,
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
higher rate of speed.
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to • FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows FCW Limited Warning
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.

If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays
“ACC/FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily,
there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, the active braking may not be fully available.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Once the condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see your
authorized dealer.

LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.

When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warnIf the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays:
ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although through the EVIC/DID to prompt the driver to remain
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have within the lane boundaries.
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
Service FCW Warning

When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The visual warning through the EVIC/DID to prompt the
LaneSense Operation

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215

driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane
marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be
provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.

Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.

LaneSense Warning Button

The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel To turn the LaneSense system ON, press the LaneSense
below the Uconnect® display.
button (LED turns off). A “Lane Sense On” message is
shown in the Driver Information Display (DID).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Driver Information Display (DID).
7.0 Driver Information Display (DID) Screen — If
Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.

Lane Sense On Message

To turn the LaneSense system OFF, press the LaneSense
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.

System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)

Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.

Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.

Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)

• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219

• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.

thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.

Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system settings can be configured
through the Uconnect® system screen.
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings:
1. Press the “Controls” button on touchscreen located on
the bottom of the Uconnect® display.
2. Press the “Settings” button.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button.
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can
configure the intensity of the torque warning and the
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the personYellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar alization settings.
behavior for a right lane departure.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221

ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever/gear
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel shift lever/gear selector position, the system will remain
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes, active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxitraction control system, electronic stability control, mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE
forward collision warning, etc.)
and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will
appear within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) indicating
EQUIPPED
the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
and audible indications of the distance between the rear less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
NOTE:

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ParkSense® Sensors

The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
EVIC/DID. It provides visual warnings to indicate the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information.

The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta- ParkSense® Display
tion of the obstacle.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC/DID will
ParkSense® Warning Display
display the park assist ready system status.

The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® Sys- distance and location relative to the vehicle.
tem. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223

If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Slow Tone/Solid Arc

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs — Left
Arcs —
Center
Arcs —
Right

WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150-120
(120-100
cm)
cm)

Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
None

79-59 in
(200-150
cm)

39-25 in
(100-65 cm)

25-12 in
(65-30 cm)

Less than
12 in
(30 cm)

None

1st Flashing

5th Solid

4th Solid

None

3rd Flashing
None

2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing

None

6th Solid

None

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1st Flashing
1st Flashing

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227

Audible
Alert
Chime

Radio Volume Reduced

None

Single 1/2Second
Tone
(for rear
center
only)
Yes

WARNING ALERTS
Slow
Slow
(for rear
(for rear
center
center
only)
only)

Yes

NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Fast
(for rear
center
only)

Fast

Yes

Continuous

3
Yes

228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the system, the instrument cluster will display the
ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
the Uconnect® display.
(EVIC) or 7⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information. When the shift lever is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®

The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and requires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
ParkSense® Switch

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229

Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for further
information. When the shift lever/gear selector is moved
to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the EVIC/DID will display the ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE
WIPE
REAR
SENSORS⬙
or
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the EVIC/DID, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.

ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:

• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
• When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument clusbumper.
ter will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn • Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the EVIC/
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
DID will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
EVIC/DID.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operating properly.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231

CAUTION!

WARNING!

• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.

• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED

up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking function by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense® off
via ParkSense® switch, or changing the gear while the
automatic brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.

• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense® Park
The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233

• The automatic braking function may only be applied if NOTE:
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid collid• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
ing with a detected obstacle.
vehicle.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of
substitute the driver.
the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
vehicle’s movements.
section of the Uconnect® System.
Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limi• ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration
tations of this system and recommendations.
state for the automatic braking function through igniParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
tion cycles.
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
changed to the ON/RUN position.
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense® is enabled at one of
these shift lever positions, the system will remain active
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately
7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above
the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear in
the EVIC/DID indicating the vehicle speed is too fast.
The system will become active again if the vehicle speed
is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense®
Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in
the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ⬙ParkSense® Active
Park Assist System⬙ section for further information.

The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
ParkSense® Sensors
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
direction, depending on the location, type and orientabumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
tion of the obstacle.
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in ParkSense® Warning Display
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta- Sound and Display is selected from the Customer tion of the obstacle.
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235

The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings
to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
7⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for further information.

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
ParkSense® Display
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
Rear Park Assist
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC/DID will vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
display the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

Slow Tone/Solid Arc

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237

Slow Tone/Solid Arc

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239

Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs — Left
Arcs —
Center
Arcs —
Right

WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150-120
(120-100
cm)
cm)

Greater
than
79 in (200
cm)
None

79-59 in
(200-150
cm)
None

None

6th Solid

None

3
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)

25-12 in
(65-30 cm)

Less than
12 in (30
cm)

None

1st Flashing

5th Solid

4th Solid

None

3rd Flashing
None

2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

1st Flashing
1st Flashing

240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Audible
Alert
Chime

None

Radio Volume Reduced

Single 1/2Second
Tone
(for rear
center
only)
Yes

WARNING ALERTS
Slow
Slow
(for rear
(for rear
center
center
only)
only)

Yes

NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Fast
(for rear
center
only)

Fast

Continuous

Yes

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241

fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense® Warning
when the 1st flashing arc appears.
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
left and/or right front region and will produce a fast
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
display will show a single arc in the center front region. vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display
will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A
Front Park Assist

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

No Tone/Solid Arc

No Tone/Flashing Arc

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Front Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs — Left
Arcs — Center
Arcs — Right
Audible Alert
Chime
Radio Volume
Reduced

Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
None
None
None
None
No

WARNING ALERTS
47-39 in
39-25 in
(120-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
None
None
4th Solid
3rd Flashing
None
None
None
None
No

NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast

Less than
12 in (30 cm)
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Continuous

Yes

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245

Front Park Assist Audible Alerts

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®

ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audible ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and the Uconnect® display.
brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the Uconnect® System is equipped, chime volume
settings will not be accessible from the EVIC/DID.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.

ParkSense® Switch

ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the
through ignition cycles.
system, the instrument cluster will display the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or 7⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information. When the shift lever is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and requires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® System
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it
will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE

REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds.
When the shift lever is moved to Reverse and the system
has detected a faulted condition, the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
(DID) will display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ pop up message for five seconds.
After five seconds, a car graphic will be displayed with
⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor location depending on where the fault is detected. The
system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that
is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙, or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an object is detected within the five

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247

second pop-up duration. The car graphic will remain
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or ⬙
Driver Information Display (DID)” for further information.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see
an authorized dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense®
system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense®.

If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE- • When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster
QUIRED⬙ message appears in the EVIC/DID, see an
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
authorized dealer.
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.

system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.

• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the • There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking
radio when it is sounding a tone.
application to be delayed.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
CAUTION!
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working • ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249

CAUTION! (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.

• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED

• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.

The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is intended to • During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parktouches the steering wheel after being instructed to
ing maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the sysproviding audible/visual instructions, and controlling
tem will cancel, and the driver will be required to
the steering wheel. The ParkSense® Active Park Assist
manually complete the parking maneuver.
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
maintains control of the accelerator, shift lever and
environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow,
brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver
etc., or if searching for a parking space that has
selection, the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver • New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30
side or passenger side).
miles accumulated before the ParkSense® Active Park
Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accuNOTE:
rately. This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
calibration to improve the performance of the feature.
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251

The system will also continuously perform the dynamic vehicle calibration to account for differences
such as over or under inflated tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense® Active
Park Assist System

The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense® Active Park
Assist switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect® display.

ParkSense® Active Park Assist Switch

To enable the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system,
press the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch once
(LED turns on).
To disable the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system,
press the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch again
(LED turns off).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will turn off • The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a
automatically for any of the following conditions:
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
• The parking maneuver is completed.
the system will cancel and the EVIC/DID will instruct
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
searching for a parking space.
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will only
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during operate and search for a parking space when the following conditions are present:
active steering guidance into the parking space.
• Touching the steering wheel during active steering •
guidance into the parking space.
•
• Pressing the ParkSense® Front and Rear Park Assist
•
switch.
•
• The Driver’s door is opened.
•
• The trunk is opened.
•
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.

The gear position is in DRIVE.
The ignition is in the RUN position.
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch is activated.
The Driver’s door is closed.
The trunk is closed.
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253

NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the EVIC/DID will instruct the driver
to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The
driver must then reactivate the system by pressing the
ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch.

Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display

When the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for
Perpendicular Park” message will appear in the Driver
Information Display (DID). You may switch to perpen• The outer surface and the underside of the front and dicular parking if you desire. Push the OK button on the
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, left side steering wheel switch to change your parking
space setting.
mud, dirt or other obstruction.
When pressed, the LED on the ParkSense® Active Park NOTE:
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn
will turn OFF if any of the above conditions are not
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
present.
want to perform the parking maneuver. The
ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
Active ParkSense Searching

• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
When an available parking space has been found, and the
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
parking space for the maneuver).
sequence.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255

Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward

Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From

Wheel
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed
from the steering wheel.
to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move backward.
steering to complete.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257

• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the DID will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.

Check Surroundings — Move Backward

NOTE:

• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.

• It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu- • If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
ver.
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE
position.

Check Surroundings — STOP

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259

Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move forward.
steering to complete.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Check Surroundings — Move Forward

Check Surroundings — STOP

When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261

Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse

When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Check Surroundings — Move Backward

Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position

Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When
the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is
satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to
PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.

Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for
Perpendicular Park” message will show in the DID
display. Push the OK button on the left side steering

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263

wheel switch to change your parking space setting to a NOTE:
perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to paral• When searching for a parking space, use the turn
lel parking if you desire.
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
Once the driver presses OK for a perpendicular parking
want to perform the parking maneuver. The
maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK
ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will automatifor Parallel Park” message will appear in the DID display.
cally search for a parking space on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).

Active ParkSense Searching Display
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
parking sequence.
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward

Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
from the steering wheel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265

Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel

Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse

When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed steering to complete.
to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

Check Surroundings — Move Backwards

The system will then instruct the driver to check their NOTE:
surroundings and move backward.
• It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267

• When the system instructs the driver to remove their When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the DID will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Check Surroundings — STOP

268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE
position.

Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive

When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

Check Surroundings — Move Forward

The system will then instruct the driver to check their When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
surroundings and move forward.
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.

Check Surroundings — STOP

NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re- When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
quired.
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

Check Surroundings — Move Backwards

The system will then instruct the driver to check their Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be insurroundings and move backward.
structed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position

• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is only
a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense® Active Park Assist system in order to
be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected.
It is recommended that the driver looks over his/
her shoulder when using the ParkSense® Active
Park Assist system.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Drivers must be careful when performing parallel
or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when
using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system.
Always check carefully behind and in front of your
vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up and moving forward. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.

• Before using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its
size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate.
ParkView® Camera Location

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned ON), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition
is switched to the OFF position.

When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.

Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
A touch screen button to disable display of the camera
the vehicle.
image is made available when the vehicle is not in REVERSE gear. Display of the camera image after shifting out The following table shows the approximate distances for
of REVERSE can be disabled via a touch screen button each zone:
personalization entry in the camera settings menu.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green

Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277

OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Power sunroof and power
sunshade switches may also be included, if equipped.

Overhead Console — Power Sunroof

Overhead Console — Power Sunroof/Sunshade

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead console.
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Center Buttons
There are two map/reading light buttons located in the
center of the overhead console that allow the lights to
operate independently.
Press the button once to turn the light on.
To turn the light off, press the button a second time.
Front Map/Reading Lights Center Buttons

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279

To turn the light off, press the lens a second time.

The overhead console has a compartment which provides
storage for a pair of sunglasses.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear mounted or
front mounted sunglass bin door.
The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome pad on the sunglass bin door to
open. Push the chrome pad on the sunglass bin door to
close.

Front Map/Reading Lights Press Lenses
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Sunglass Bin Door — Rear Mounted

Sunglass Bin Door — Front Mounted

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.

The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the sun visor
designate the three different HomeLink® channels.

HomeLink® Buttons

NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.

NOTE: Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required
by federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features. Call
toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283

To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink® open and close the door. The name and color of the
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red button may vary by manufacturer.
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manuTraining The Garage Door Opener
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located 1 — Door Opener
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door 2 — Training Button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.

attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)

Programming A Non-Rolling Code

For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, before 1995.
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programtransmitter button.
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
and observe the indicator light.
remaining steps.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT several seconds of transmission.
erase the channels.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigReprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans(Non-Rolling Code)
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
follow these steps:
time-out in the same manner.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do door or gate motor.
not release the button.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
and observe the indicator light.
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programlight in view.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button,
•
To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
erase the channels.
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
fully trained.
programming, plug it back in at this time.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take (Canadian/Gate Operator)
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming. To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
not release the button.
erased.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®

Troubleshooting Tips

To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:

Security

• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.

• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.

WARNING! (Continued)
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
General Information

WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
(Continued)

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
Sunroof Switch
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
1 — Opening Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Closing Sunroof

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
held rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Closing Sunroof — Express
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucPress the switch forward and release it within one-half
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
release to Express Close.
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
the sunroof.
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode

Venting Sunroof — Express

To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.

Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293

Sunshade Operation

Sunroof Maintenance

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition Off Operation
open.
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
Wind Buffeting
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
will cancel this feature.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.

Power Shade Switches

Power Sunroof Switches

The power shade switches are located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the sunroof switch rearward and release it within
one-half second. The sunroof will open automatically to
the full open position and automatically stop. (If the
sunshade is in the closed position when the operation is
initiated the sunshade will automatically open to the half
open position prior to the sunroof opening). This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode

Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode

To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will (if the sunshade is in the closed position
when the operation is initiated the sunshade will automatically open to the half open position prior to the
sunroof opening) open to the full open position and
automatically stop. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held again.

Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
Closing Sunroof — Express
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automativent switch is pressed, the sunshade will automatically
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
opening to the Vent position.
the sunroof.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297

Opening Power Shade — Express

Closing Power Shade — Express

Press the shade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to
the halfway position and stop automatically. Press the
switch a second time from the halfway position and the
shade will automatically open to the full open position
and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”.
During Express Open operation, any movement of the
shade switch will stop the shade.

Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the shade.

NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pressing the shade close button again
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade
To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward. completely.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
half-open position. Press and hold the shade switch
To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
again.
rearward again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunThis feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obwindow.
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc- Sunroof Maintenance
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
release to Express Close.
the glass panel.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
Ignition Off Operation
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
Wind Buffeting
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of will cancel this feature.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurYour Instrument Panel” for further information.
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
Pinch Protect Feature

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
to the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE: All accessories connected to the “battery” powFront Power Outlet
ered outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
discharge.
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
The front power outlet is located next to the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

Front Center Console Outlet

NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® cigar
knob and element must be used.

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.

CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the
forward wall of storage bin (below media center) of
center console. This outlet can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring power
up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as
Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
Power Inverter Outlet
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset.
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device.
The outlet automatically turns off when the device is
unplugged.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303

CUPHOLDERS

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.

Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the center console forward
of the armrest between the front seats.

Front Seat Cupholders

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.

Rear Seat Cupholders

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305

STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to
open the glove compartment.
NOTE: The glove compartment handle is equipped with
a lock. To lock the glove compartment, remove the
emergency key from the key fob, insert emergency key
into glove compartment handle lock cylinder and turn
the key to the lock position and remove the key. Use the
reverse sequence to unlock the glove compartment.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Glove Compartment Release Handle

306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Console Features
There is a storage compartment located under the center
console armrest.

The armrest can be slid forward/rearward to allow
driver/passenger comfort position.

WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
There is a front center console storage area located under
the center console cupholder.
• To access the front center console storage area press the
release button and pull rearward.
NOTE: The center console cupholder can be placed in
any position to maintain access to the storage area.

Center Console Armrest Storage

Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of
the armrest, to open the storage compartment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307

Center Console Cupholder Release

Front Center Console Storage

Located inside the center console storage compartment is
a line that indicates how much storage is allowed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

308 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Storage Compartment Fill Line

Center Console Storage Passage

NOTE: Filling the console storage area above this line
may impede the sliding of the cupholder.
Located inside the front of the console storage area power
cords can be routed from the storage area to the center
console pass-through.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 309

Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas with a bottle
holder.

Front Center Console Pass-Through

Front Door Storage

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

310 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped

CARGO AREA FEATURES

For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat — If
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage Equipped
compartment.
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling the
seatback loops between the seatbacks and the bolsters.
When the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous, nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
NOTE: The rear seatback loops can be tucked away
when not in use.

Rear Armrest Storage

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 311

Rear Seatback Loops

Folded Rear Seatback

After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.

When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

312 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.

The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 313

Grocery Bag Hooks

CAUTION!

The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag hooks,
located on either side of the rear cargo area.

Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 35 lbs
(16 kg) of the grocery bag hook. Damage may occur to
hook and mounting surface.
Ski Pass-Through
There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear
seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis,
to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and
pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through
door.

Grocery Bag Hooks

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

314 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control. Press this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15
minutes. For an additional 5 minutes of operation, press
the button a second time.
Ski Pass-Through

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 315

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .320

▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . .349

䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE . . . . . . . . . .321

▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . .354

䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . .322 䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .356
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .323
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333

▫ Driver Information Display (DID) - 7⬙
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
▫ Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
3.5” Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335

▫ Instrument Cluster Messages For (EVIC) And
(DID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371

▫ Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . .373

▫ Instrument Cluster Messages For (EVIC) And
䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
(DID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379

▫ Manual Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400

▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .379

▫ Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405

▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect® 5.0/8.4A/8.4AN
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379

▫ Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411

䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .397

▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417

䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .397

▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .419

䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398

▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420

▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399

䡵 Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423

▫ Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399

▫ Introducing Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423

䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .399

▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400

▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426

䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400

▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319

▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429

▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436

▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430

▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437

▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432

▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438

▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432

▫ Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438

▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434

▫ SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . .440

▫ Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . .435

▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1
2
3
4
5

— Air Outlet
— EVIC/DID Controls
— Instrument Cluster
— Cruise/Adaptive Cruise Control
— Ignition Switch

6 — Radio Screen
7 — Passenger Air Bag
8 — Glove Compartment
9 — Radio Controls
10 — Manual Climate Controls
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

11 — Steering Wheel
12 — Hood Release
13 — Headlight Switch

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Red EVIC/DID Telltales
2. Amber EVIC/DID Telltales
3. Brake Warning Light

has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.

This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condidisengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake the brake fluid level checked.
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesSystem (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. sary.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied it does not show the degree of brake application.

4. LaneSense Service — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
LaneSense Departure has detected a failure.
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required . 5. Speed For Electronic Cruise Control Setting
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

This displays the set speed of the Electronic
Speed Control.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325

6. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Dis- 8. Turn Signal Indicators
play
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn
signals when the turn signal lever is operated.
This will display the distance setting for the
A tone will chime, and an EVIC/DID message
ACC system. For further information, refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Underwill appear if either turn signal is left on for
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
7. Seat Belt Reminder Light

NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for
a defective outside light bulb.

When the ignition switch is first turned to the
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four 9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
when the ignition switch is turned to the
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction InRefer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles 10. Air Bag Warning Light
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
problem diagnosed and corrected.
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
NOTE:
on
while
driving,
have the system inspected at an autho• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
rized
dealer
as
soon
as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
Restraints”
in
“Things
To Know Before Starting Your
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
Vehicle”
for
further
information.
to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the 11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Conpreviously.
trol (ESC) is off.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds 12. Tire Pressure Monitoring
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327

by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS 13. Antilock Brake System (ABS)
to continue to function properly.
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
CAUTION!
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
warning have been established for the tire size indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- is not functioning and that service is required. However,
tion or sensor damage may result when using re- the conventional brake system will continue to operate
placement equipment that is not of the same size, normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329

17. Engine Temperature

14. Fuel Filler Door Location
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.

When the engine temperature gets too high, the
temperature icon will change color from light blue
to red.
18. High Beam Indicator

15. Fuel Gauge

Indicates that headlights are on high beam.

The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
16. Gear Selector Status (PRNDL/S)
• P = Park
• R = Reverse
• N = Neutral
• D = Drive
• L = Low – If Equipped
• S = Sport – If Equipped

19. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

The shift status “P,R,N,D,L/,S” are displayed indicating Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
the shifter position. Refer to “Starting And Operating”. poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.

CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.

WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
20. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
21. Stop/Start Autostop Active
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Stop/Start icon is highlighted
in the EVIC/DID. Press and release the
SELECT/RIGHT arrow button to display the
Stop/Start status. This telltale will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function can go into “Autostop” mode.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331

22. Vehicle Security Alarm

26. Temperature Gauge

This light will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
ignition is first turned on.

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

23. Tachometer

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
24. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
25. EVIC White Telltales — If Equipped

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.

odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.

27. Electronic Vehicle Information Display (EVIC) and
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
Driver Information Display (DID) Odometer Display
shows the Instrument Cluster Messages for EVIC/DID.
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve- Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
hicle has been driven.
Driver Information Display (DID)” for further
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of information.
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)

The EVIC Main Menu items consists of the following:

• Speedometer
The 3.5” Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Vehicle Info
display is located in the instrument cluster.
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
• Stop/Start — If Equipped
• Audio Info
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Settings
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Arrow Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll
wheel:
upward through the Main Menu items ( Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Fuel Economy, Trip A,
Trip B, Stop/Start, Audio, Messages, Screen Set
Up, Settings).
• DOWN Arrow Button
Press and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the Main Menu
items (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Fuel
Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Stop/Start, Audio,
Messages, Screen Set Up, Settings).
• RIGHT Arrow Button
EVIC Controls

Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335

• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Press and release the LEFT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push
and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
3.5” Display

1. Electronic Park Brake Failure — If Equipped

The 3.5” EVIC displays are located in the center portion
of the cluster.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic
Park Brake Fault. Please see your authorized
dealer for assistance.

336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

2. Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337

3. Engine Temperature Warning Light
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
This light warns of an overheated engine condi(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge apDistribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
proaches
H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
chime
will
sound after reaching a set threshold.
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the veON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for aphicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
inspected by an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

4. Main Display Area
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as
long as the condition that activated it remains active)
and can be reviewed from the “Messages” main
menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an
“i” will be displayed in the EVIC’s compass/outside
temp line. Examples of this message type are “Right
Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure”.

• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
the condition that activated the message is cleared.
Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”
(if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
leaves the vehicle).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the
ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message
type are “Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and
“Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
An example of this message type is “Automatic High
Beams On”.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339

6. Fuel Gauge

5. LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning system provides the
driver with visual and steering torque warnings
when the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane
unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
• When the LaneSense Warning system is ON and
ready the lane lines and LaneSense Warning indicator are the color gray.
• When the LaneSense Warning system is armed, the
lane lines change to white and the LaneSense Warning indicator changes to green.
• When the LaneSense Warning system senses a lane
cross situation, the approaching lane line and the
LaneSense Warning indicator change from white to
yellow.
For further information, refer to “LaneSense Operation”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

Fuel Gauge displays the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
7. Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
8. Reconfigurable Yellow Telltale Display
• Forward Collision Warning Indicator
This telltale will turn on warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you.
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
windshield washer fluid is low.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. For further
information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• LaneSense Service — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
LaneSense Departure has detected a
failure.
• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the fuel
filler cap is loose.

• Stop/Start Service Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service is required.
• Service AWD Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All
Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning properly and that service is required.
9. Reconfigurable White Telltale Area
• Electronic Speed Control ON
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341

10. Reconfigurable Red Telltale Display
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
speed control is SET. For further information,
This telltale indicates engine oil temperarefer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Unture is high. If the light turns on while
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
This light will turn on when the vehicle
• Power Steering System Over Temperature — If
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control
Equipped
(ACC) has reached the speed desired and
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” mesthe set button has been selected. For further informasage and a steering wheel icon are distion, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Underplayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indistanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
cates that the vehicle needs to be taken to
the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
power steering assistance. Refer to “Power Steering”
This light will turn on when the vehicle
in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) has been turned on and in the READY
state. For further information, refer to “Electronic
Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase
in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle
speeds and during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer
for service.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical
charging system. If the light stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s
non-essential electrical devices or increase engine
speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains
on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure.
The light should turn on momentarily when
the engine is started. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as
soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes
when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in
the engine. The engine oil level must be checked
under the hood.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with
the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The light will come on when the
ignition is first turned ON and remain on

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343

briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when
the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever
is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn
off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. You may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.

• Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one
or more doors may be ajar.
• Decklid Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate the decklid may be ajar.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive
transmission fluid temperature that might
occur with severe usage such as trailer
towing. It may also occur when operating
the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition.
If this light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in
NEUTRAL until the light goes off.

CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
11. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345

CAUTION!

WARNING! (Continued)

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.

Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.

Oil Change Reset
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime
has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty
cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval
may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving
style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

release the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator Instrument Cluster Messages For (EVIC) And
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) (DID)
refer to the following procedure.
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times •
within 10 seconds.
•
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
•
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
•
OFF/LOCK position.

Service Airbag System
Traction Control Off
Washer Fluid Low
Oil Pressure Low

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you • Oil Change Due
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
• Fuel Low
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347

• Service Power Steering

• Service Electronic Throttle Control

• Cruise Off

• Lights On

• Cruise Ready

• Right Turn Signal Light Out

• Cruise Set To XXX MPH

• Left Turn Signal Light Out

• Cruise Set To XXX KM/H

• Turn Signal On

• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to •
XX”
•
• Service Tire Pressure System
•
• Parking Brake Engaged
•
• Brake Fluid Low
•
• Service Electronic Braking System
•
• Engine Temperature Hot
•
• Battery Voltage Low
•

Vehicle Not in Park
Key in Ignition
Key in Ignition Lights On
Remote Start Active Key to Run
Remote Start Active Push Start Button
Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
Remote Start Aborted Door Open

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open

• Autostick Unavailable Service Required

• Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open

• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.

• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired

• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake

• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset

• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool

• Service Airbag System

• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive

• Service Airbag Warning Light

• Service Transmission

• Door Open

• Service Shifter

• Doors Open

• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling

• Gear Not Available

• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On

• Shift Not Allowed

• Washer Fluid Low

• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse

The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349

button to scroll through the information sub-menus and
Push the OK button to select or reset the following
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
resettable sub-menus:
the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
EVIC.
Tire Pressure
EVIC Selectable Menu Items

Speedometer

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until “Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC/DID. Push
the Speedometer Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the
and release the RIGHT arrow button to toggle following will be displayed:
between km/h and MPH and push the OK button to If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
select your speedometer display.
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC/DID.
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and Coolant
Temp will be displayed. Push the LEFT or RIGHT arrow

If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire Fuel Economy
Pressure System” is displayed.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted.
reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return • Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG or
to the main menu.
L/100 km with Bargraph)
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” • Range To Empty (RTE)
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
• Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km)
Coolant Temperature
Trip Info
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
Only
the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left
Oil Temp
or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information
will display the following:
Oil Life
• Distance
Battery Voltage
• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351

Hold the OK button to reset feature information.

Stored Messages

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Messages Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. This
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
feature shows the number of stored warning messages.
the Stop/Start message is displayed in the EVIC/DID.
Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see
Push and release the OK button to display the Stop/Start
what the stored messages are.
status.
Screen Setup
Audio
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. Push
the Audio Menu displays in the EVIC/DID.
and release the OK button to enter the sub-menus. The
Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the
location that information is displayed.
Stop/Start – If Equipped

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vehicle Settings (EVIC)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Settings
Language Select
Units Select
FCW Sensitivity
ParkSense
Blind Spot Alert
Hill Start Assist
Auto Lock Doors
Auto Unlock Doors
Passive Entry
Remote Unlock Sequence
Key Fob Linked to Memory
Remote Start Comfort
System

Translation Message
Language
Units
FCW Sensitivity
ParkSense
Blind Spot Alert
Hill Start Asst
Auto Lock Doors
Auto Unlock Doors
Passive Entry
Remote Unlock
Key in Memory
Rmt Start Comfort
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Submenu
English, Spanish, French
U.S., Metric
Off, Near, Far
Off, Sound Only, Sound & Display
Off, Lights Only, Lights & Chime
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
Driver Door, All Doors
On, Off
On, Off

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353

Translation Message
Horn w/ Rmt Start

Submenu
On, Off

Horn w/ Rmt Lock

On, Off

15
16
17
18
19
20

Settings
Sound Horn with Remote
Start
Sound Horn with Remote
Lock
Flash Lights with Lock
Daytime Running Lights
Automatic Highbeams
Headlights On with Wipers
Rain Sensing Wipers
Headlights Off Delay

Lights w/ Lock
Daytime Lights
Auto Highbeams
Lights w/ Wipers
Auto Wipers
Lights Off Delay

Key-Off Power Delay

Power Off Delay

Illuminated Approach

Lights w/ Unlock

On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
0 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90
seconds
Off, 45 seconds, 5 minutes, 10
minutes
0 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90
seconds

13
14

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

23
24
25
26
27

Settings
Easy Exit Seat
Tilt Mirror in Reverse
Compass variance
Calibrate Compass
Brake Service

Translation Message
Easy Exit Seat
Tilt Mirror in R
Compass Var
Compass Cal
Brake Service

Auto Park Brake

Submenu
On, Off
On, Off
See Owner’s Manual, X Increment
Press > to calibrate the compass
Follow the VF specifically for this
one
On, Off

Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items

• Range To Empty (RTE)

1. Upper Left

• Average MPG

• None

• Current MPG

• Compass (default)

2. Upper Right

• Outside Temp

• None

• Time

• Compass
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355

• Outside Temp (default)

• Average MPG

• Time

• Current MPG

• Range To Empty (RTE)

• Trip A

• Average MPG

• Trip B

• Current MPG

• Audio Information

NOTE: defaults will change to Average MPG UR, Range • Menu Title (Default Setting)
UL if the proxies for Compass and Outside Temp are not
• Digital Speedo
available
4. Current Gear
3. Center
• On
• None
• Off (Default)
• Compass
5. Defaults (defaults: Compass UR, Outside Temp UL,
• Outside Temp
Center Menu Title, Gear Display Off)
• Time
• Restore
• Range To Empty

• Cancel
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)

The DID Main Menu items consists of the following:

The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver- • Speedometer
interactive display that is located in the instrument
• Vehicle Info
cluster.
• Driver Assist
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
• Stop/Start — If Equipped
• Audio Info
• Messages
• Screen Setup
Driver Information Display (DID)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357

The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Arrow Button
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
wheel:
upward through the main menu and submenus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip Info, Stop/Start Info,
Audio, Messages, Screen Setup).
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver
Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip Info, Stop/Start
Info, Audio, Messages, Screen Setup).
• RIGHT Arrow Button
DID Controls

Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button

Driver Information Display (DID) - 7ⴖ Display

Push and release the LEFT arrow button to The 7” DID displays are located in the center portion of
access the information screens or sub-menu the cluster.
screens of a main menu item.
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or sub-menu screens of a main menu item. push
and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.

Driver Information Display (DID) Display

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359

1. Red Reconfigurable Telltale Display
• Power Steering System Over Temperature — If
Equipped
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to
the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost
power steering assistance. Refer to “Power Steering”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase
in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle
speeds and during parking maneuvers.

• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one
or more doors may be ajar.
• Decklid Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate the decklid may be ajar.
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure.
The light should turn on momentarily when
the engine is started. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as
soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes
when this light turns on.

• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer
for service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in
the engine. The engine oil level must be checked
under the hood.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical
charging system. If the light stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s
non-essential electrical devices or increase engine
speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains
on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.

• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with
the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The light will come on when the
ignition is first turned ON and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when
the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever
is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn
off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. You may experience

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361

reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible.
• Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.

CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

3. Amber Reconfigurable Telltale Display
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
windshield washer fluid is low.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. For further
information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• LaneSense Service — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
Lane Sense Departure has detected a
failure.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363

• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Indicator
4. Brake Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the fuel
This light monitors various brake functions,
filler cap is loose.
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
• Stop/Start Service Indicator
the
brake
fluid
level is low, or that there is a problem with
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
the
anti-lock
brake
system reservoir.
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service is required.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
• Service AWD Indicator
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not function- Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
ing properly and that service is required.
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
• Forward Collision Warning Indicator
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
This telltale will turn on warn you of a
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
possible collision with the vehicle in front
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
of you.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.

WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
sary.
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
5. Driver Information Display (DID)
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as
long as the condition that activated it remains active)

and can be reviewed from the “Messages” main
menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an
“i” will be displayed in the middle of the DID’s top
line. Examples of this message type are “Right Front
Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure”.
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
the condition that activated the message is cleared.
Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”
(if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
leaves the vehicle).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the
ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message
type are “Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and
“Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start”.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
An example of this message type is “Automatic High
Beams On”.
6. Electronic Park Brake Failure
This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic
Park Brake Fault. Please see your authorized
dealer for assistance.
7. LaneSense Warning — If Equipped

• When the LaneSense Warning system is ON and
ready the lane lines and LaneSense Warning indicator are the color gray.
• When the LaneSense Warning system is armed, the
lane lines change to white and the LaneSense Warning indicator changes to green.
• When the LaneSense Warning system senses a lane
cross situation, the approaching lane line and the
LaneSense Warning indicator change from white to
yellow.
For further information, refer to “LaneSense Operation”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

The LaneSense Warning system provides the
driver with visual and steering torque warnings
when the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane
unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367

8. Reconfigurable Info Area
• Compass
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range
• Average MPG
• Current MPG
9. Speed For Electronic Cruise Control Setting
This displays the set speed of the Electronic
Speed Control.

• Electronic Speed Control SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting
Display
This will display the distance setting for the
ACC system. For further information, refer
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

11. Sub Menu Text
• Individual Tire Pressure Monitor
10. Dedicated Cruise Control Telltales
• Coolant Temp
• Electronic Speed Control ON
• Transmission Temperature
This light will turn on when the electronic
• Oil Temperature
speed control is ON. For further information,
• Oil Life
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un• Battery Voltage
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

12. Low Fuel Display
This area will display text to the visual warnings (i.e., “Push Brake To Start”).
Odometer Display/Fuel Gauge/Temperature Gauge/
Submenu Area
• The odometer display shows the total distance the
vehicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser
the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If
your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the
repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero,
and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating
what the mileage was before the repair or service. It
is a good idea for you to make a record of the

odometer reading before the repair/service, so that
you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the
door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be
reset at zero.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the DID messages and Submenus.
• Fuel Gauge
Fuel Gauge displays the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
• Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369

CAUTION!

WARNING! (Continued)

Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.

13. Gear Selector Status (PRNDL/S)
The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,/S” are displayed indicating the shifter lever position. Refer to “Starting And
Operating”.
• P = Park
• R = Reverse
• N = Neutral
• D = Drive
• L = Low – If Equipped
• S = Sport – If Equipped

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

release the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
When the engine temperature gets too high, the
refer to the following procedure.
temperature icon will change color from light blue
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
to red.
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
Oil Change Reset
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
Oil Change Due
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
within 10 seconds.
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change
OFF/LOCK position.
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty
cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
style.
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
14. Engine Temperature Display

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371

Instrument Cluster Messages For (EVIC) And
(DID)
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Service Airbag System

• Service Power Steering
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Cruise Set To XXX KM/H

• Traction Control Off

• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”

• Washer Fluid Low

• Service Tire Pressure System

• Oil Pressure Low

• Parking Brake Engaged

• Oil Change Due

• Brake Fluid Low

• Fuel Low

• Service Electronic Braking System

• Service Antilock Brake System

• Engine Temperature Hot

• Service Electronic Throttle Control

• Battery Voltage Low
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Service Electronic Throttle Control

• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open

• Lights On

• Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open

• Right Turn Signal Light Out

• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired

• Left Turn Signal Light Out

• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset

• Turn Signal On

• Service Airbag System

• Vehicle Not in Park

• Service Airbag Warning Light

• Key in Ignition

• Door Open

• Key in Ignition Lights On

• Doors Open

• Remote Start Active Key to Run

• Gear Not Available

• Remote Start Active Push Start Button

• Shift Not Allowed

• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low

• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse

• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold

• Autostick Unavailable Service Required

• Remote Start Aborted Door Open

• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373

• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake

EVIC Selectable Menu Items

• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
EVIC.

• Service Transmission

Speedometer

• Service Shifter
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On
• Washer Fluid Low

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Speedometer Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. Push
and release the RIGHT arrow button to toggle
between km/h and MPH and push the OK button to
select your speedometer display.

The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the Vehicle Info
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
middle, and red telltales on the left.
the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC/DID.
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and Coolant
Temp will be displayed. Push the LEFT or RIGHT arrow

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

button to scroll through the information sub-menus and If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Push the OK button to select or reset the following Pressure System” is displayed.
resettable sub-menus:
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
Tire Pressure
reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return
to the main menu.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC/DID. Push Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
and release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
following will be displayed:
Coolant Temperature
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
Only
ICON.
Oil Temp
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire Oil Life
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
Battery Voltage
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375

Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The steering wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
information displayed depends on ACC system status.
ACC SET
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu

Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of instrument cluster.
the following displays in the DID:
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap- •
tive Cruise Control Off.”
•
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
•
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise •
Control Ready.”
•

Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning

• ACC Unavailable Warning

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• The DID will return to the last display selected after • Range To Empty (RTE)
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
• Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km)
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise ConTrip Info
trol (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left
LaneSense Menu
or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information
The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings. will display the following:
The information displayed depends on LaneSense sys• Distance
tem status and the conditions that need to be met. For
further information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” • Average Fuel Economy
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• Elapsed Time
Fuel Economy
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted.
• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG or
L/100 km with Bargraph)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377

Stop/Start – If Equipped

Screen Setup

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Stop/Start message is displayed in the EVIC/DID.
Push and release the OK button to display the Stop/Start
status.

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. Push
and release the OK button to enter the sub-menus. The
Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the
location that information is displayed.

Audio

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
Uconnect® SETTINGS
the Audio Menu displays in the EVIC/DID.
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on
Stored Messages
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
the Messages Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. This access and change the customer programmable features.
feature shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see
what the stored messages are.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Uconnect® 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate

Uconnect® 8.4 Buttons On Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen

1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379

Buttons On The Faceplate

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Buttons are located below the Uconnect® system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® display.

Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and
Back buttons located below the system.
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect®
screen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to turn
the screen on.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect® system.

Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect® 5.0/8.4A/8.4AN Settings
Uconnect® 5.0 — If a SETTINGS button on the faceplate
exists, push this button. If not, push the MORE button on
the faceplate and press the ⬙Settings⬙ button on the
touchscreen. The remaining settings are defined for the
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN — Press the “Apps” button on
the touchscreen, then press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this
mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance (if
equipped), Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

equipped), Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/ Display
Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Per- After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
sonal Data (if equipped).
the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
• Display Mode
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen or the Back
button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or
press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the list of available settings.

This feature allows you to select one of the auto display
settings. To change Mode status, press and release the
Auto or Manual button on the touchscreen. Then press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen or push the
back button on the faceplate.
• Display Brightness With Headlights On
This feature allows you to select the display brightness
when the headlights are on. Adjust the brightness with
the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen. Then
press the back arrow button on the touchscreen, or push
the back button on the faceplate.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381

• Display Brightness With the Headlights Off

• Units

This feature allows you to select the display brightness
when the headlights are off. Adjust the brightness with
the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen. Then
press the back arrow button on the touchscreen, or push
the back button on the faceplate.

This feature allows you to select US or Metric units of
measure in the EVIC/DID, odometer, and navigation
system (if equipped). Press “US” or “Metric” until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.

• Set Language
This feature allows you to select one of the languages for
all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set
Language” button on the touchscreen and then press the
desired language button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the language, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.

• Touchscreen Beep
This feature allows you to turn on or shut off the sound
heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. Press the
“Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the driver screen/EVIC/DID/Cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within
a programmed route. To turn on or enable, press the
“Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.

back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate.
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Sync Time With GPS

This feature allows you to automatically have the radio
set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
• Voice
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
This feature allows you to change the Voice Response the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length, the back button on the faceplate.
press the “Brief” (Brief is a shortened response for
advanced users) or “Detailed” (Detailed provides more • Set Time Hours
comprehensive responses for new users) button on the This feature allows you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383

buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
return to the previous menu or press the ”X” button on • Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
This feature allows you to choose to show the time in the
• Set Time Minutes
Status bar. To change the Time in Status Bar setting, press
This feature allows you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync the “Show Time in Status Bar” button on the touchscreen
with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
Safety & Driving Assistance
return to the previous menu or press the “X” button on
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail• Time Format
able:
This feature allows you to select the time format display • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Sensitivity — If
setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the touch- Equipped
screen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or
24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected. The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can
be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction
time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving
experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a
possible collision when you are much closer to the
vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW status, press
and release the “Near” or “Far” button. Then press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen, or push the back
button on the faceplate.

The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the
driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a
potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes
active at 5 mph (8 km/h) and is only enabled when FCW
is on.
For further information, refer to “Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• LaneSense Warning — If Equipped

For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con- When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
lane departures. The LaneSense Warning can be set to
Vehicle”.
provide either an “early”, “medium” or “late” warning
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking —
zone start point.
If Equipped
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure WarnThe FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to
Vehicle”.
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385

• LaneSense Strength — If Equipped

Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
information.
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can • Front ParkSense® Volume — If Equipped
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane Front ParkSense® volume settings can be selected from
departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
the EVIC/DID or Uconnect® System (if equipped). The
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and
(LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”. “HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
• ParkSense® — If Equipped

• Rear ParkSense® Volume — If Equipped

The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. To change the ParkSense status, press and release the checkbox for “Sound” or “Sound and Display.”

Rear ParkSense® volume settings can be selected from
the EVIC/DID or Uconnect® System (if equipped). The
chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and
“HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Rear ParkSense® Braking Assist — If Equipped

appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
When this feature is selected, the ParkSense® system will
to return to the previous menu.
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to help stop the vehicle (only en- • Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
abled when ParkSense® is also on).
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Braking Assist” in “Under- can be set to Off, Lights Only or Lights and Chime. The
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system func- Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights
category. When this category is selected, the Blind Spot
tion and operating information.
Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
visual alert in the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime
When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mir- category is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE- audible alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is
VERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactiprevious position when the transmission is shifted out of vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the
REVERSE. To enable or turn on, press the “Tilt Mirrors In “Off,” “Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the
Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen, or push the back button on the faceplate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387

NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.

• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay

• ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines — If
Equipped

When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield and the wipers are set to an intermittent position. To make your selection, press the “Rain
Sensing” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.

When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines
are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to
illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed
center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines — If
Equipped

When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView®
Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for
up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers

• Electric Park Brake Service Mode — If Equipped

This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle
When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven system, to
overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate command the electric park brake retraction, to service the
rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
the width of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

For further information, refer to “Electric Parking Brake touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds. A check-mark appears next to setting indicating
(EPD)” in “Starting and Operating.”
that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
• Auto Park Brake
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
Auto Park Brake will set the park brake once the vehicle menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
is set in park (or at key off for a manual transmission)
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
• Hill Start Assist
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
This setting will hold the brake if the driver is on a hill and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
and takes their foot off the brake to accelerate.
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
Lights
press the + or - button on the touchscreen to select your
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the desired time interval. Press the back arrow button on the
following settings will be available.
touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the
back button on the faceplate.
• Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
setting, press the “Headlights Off Delay” button on the

• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389

The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back
button on the faceplate. Refer to “Lights — If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.

• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the passive
entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without
the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your
selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
Doors & Locks
• Flash Lights With Lock
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
• Auto Door Locks
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
The Auto Door Lock feature can be enabled, or disabled, passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
by your authorized dealer. Please visit your local autho- or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
rized Chrysler dealer for further information.
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
• Auto Unlock On Exit
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is on the faceplate.
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock
On Exit” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark • Sound Horn With Remote
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated via the key fob. To make your
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391

selection, press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd
Press” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.

press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.

• Sound Horn With Remote Start

NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which
Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only
the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the
handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door
opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door
is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used
to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the
remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the
“Sound Horn With Remote Start” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Select one of three options to
sound the horn, Off, 1st Press, or 2nd Press. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Passive Entry

NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.

This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
touchscreen, one of the following settings will be avail• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob On/Off — If
able:
Equipped
• Auto-On Driver Heated Seat OR Auto-On Driver
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to Heated Seat & Steering wheel OR Auto-On Driver
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the Heated/Vented Seat OR Auto-On Driver Heated/Vented
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory Seat & Steering Wheel
Linked To FOB” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting When this feature is selected the driver’s heated/vented
has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393

when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat
will turn on. To make your selection, press “Off,” “Remote
Start Only,” OR “All Starts” checkbox until a check-mark
appears next to the setting option. Select “Off,” “Remote
Start Only” OR “All Starts” to determine when the feature
is activated. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
• Engine Off Power Delay

When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
Engine Off Options
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status, press the “0 seconds,”
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
“45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the
• Easy Exit Seat
touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to touchscreen.
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
• Headlight Off Delay
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit
Seats” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

setting, press the “Headlights Off Delay” button on the
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds. A check-mark appears next to setting indicating
that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.

the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.

Audio

• Speed Adjusted Volume
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
following settings will be available.
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
• Balance/Fade
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
settings. Press and drag the ’C’ icon, use the arrows to • Surround Sound — If Equipped
adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
• Equalizer
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off” followed
settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395

• AUX Volume Match

SiriusXM Setup

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.

After pressing the SIRIUS Setup button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Channel Skip

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to, or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selecPhone/Bluetooth®
tion, press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen,
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the select the channels you would like to skip followed by
pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Subscription Information
• Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer limited time subscription to SiriusXM™ Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen in order to resubscribe.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to select Yes to restore, or Cancel to exit. Once the settings
are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to
access the Subscription Information screen.
default.⬙ Press the okay button on the touchscreen to exit.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on Clear Personal Data
the screen or visit the provider online.
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a separate subscription on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
and is available for U.S. residents only.
• Clear Personal Data
Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To Clear Personal Data press the “Yes” or “No” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
touchscreen. A check mark will appear in the box when
• Restore Settings
selected. Then press the back arrow button on the touchWhen this feature is selected it will reset the Display, screen.
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397

Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the front storage area of the center console,
this feature allows an iPod®/MP3 player, or an external
USB device, to be connected to the audio system.

USB/AUX Ports
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Port

iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® User’s
Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399

Pushing the center button will make the radio switch Media Mode
between the various audio modes available (AM/FM/ Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
SXM/AUX, etc.).
track on the selected media (Disc, AUX, Bluetooth®).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the
control is different depending on which audio mode you previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
while in mode.
Radio Operation

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES

Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
The button located in the center of the left-hand control by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
grammed in the radio preset button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be CLIMATE CONTROLS
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
General Information
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system disThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
play.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
the party responsible for compliance could void the
display.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Manual Climate Controls
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
• This device must accept any interference received, system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
including interference that may cause undesired op- dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can
eration.
be set to obtain desired interior conditions.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401

Front Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use
this control to regulate the amount of
air forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the OFF position.
Temperature Control
Manual Climate Controls
1 — RECIRCULATION Control
2 — Front Blower Control
3 — MAX Air Conditioning
(A/C)
4 — Temperature Control

5 — Air Conditioning (A/C)
6 — REAR DEFROST Mode
7 — MODE Control

Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the
blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates
warmer temperatures.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Air Conditioning Operation

Mode Control (Air Direction)

Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning
(A/C). A LED will illuminate when the A/C system is
engaged.

Mode control allows you to choose
from several patterns of air distribution. You can select either a primary
MAX A/C
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
For maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is selected the
a blend of two of these modes. The
A/C is turned on automatically and the air is
closer the control is to a particular
recirculated.
mode, the more air distribution you
receive
from
that
mode.
NOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C
position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C Panel Mode
button is pushed. If your air conditioning performance
seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrucondenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
mulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water
airflow.
spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow
to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403

Bi-Level Mode

Mix Mode

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort,
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved Defrost Mode
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode
with maximum blower and warm temperature settings
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
for best windshield and side window defrosting.
small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C
button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help
dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these
modes only when necessary.
Floor Mode

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Recirculation Control

of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the outside air position.

Push this button to choose between outside air intake or
recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A LED will • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbilluminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use
ing the mode control selection by pushing the A/C
the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any outbutton.
side odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly
Air Outlets
upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
NOTE:
be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control
button is pushed when airflow.
• If the RECIRCULATION
the system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
indicator will flash three times and then turn off to
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
seat passengers.
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
Economy Mode
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor.
• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405

Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem- Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If
perature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Equipped
Floor modes.
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Faceplate
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may Uconnect® screen.
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.

Uconnect® Manual Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Buttons On Your Uconnect® Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® system screen.

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Manual Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Uconnect® 5.0 Manual Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen

Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On
Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407

again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off. level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side win2. A/C Button
dow defrosting and defogging. If the front defrost mode
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi- is turned off the climate system will return the previous
nates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again setting.
will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode
5. Rear Defrost Button
and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster
3. Recirculation Button
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicaPress to change the current setting, the indicator illumi- tor will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on.
nates when ON.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off after
10 minutes. For each additional press of this button, five
4. Front Defrost Button
additional minutes will be added to the timer function.
Press to change the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON.
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

6. Blower Control

Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either buttons on the
faceplate or buttons on the touchscreens as follows:
Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409

NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
warmer air from the floor outlets.
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
• Floor Mode
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
7. Modes

• Panel Mode

of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.
• Mix Mode
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
snowy conditions.
located adjacent to the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
amount of airflow from these outlets.
and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not
• Bi-Level Mode
pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windAir comes from the instrument panel outlets and shield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed when necessary.
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

8. Climate Control OFF Button

11. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 5.0)

Press this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.

Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
9. Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect® 8.4)
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
Provides temperature control. Press the button on the area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the temfaceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touch- perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperascreen, press and slide the button on the touchscreen tures.
temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
10. Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect® 8.4)
Provides temperature control. Press the button on the
faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the
touchscreen, press and slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the red arrow button on
the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411

Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Faceplate

Buttons On Your Uconnect® Touchscreen
Buttons on your touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® system screen.

Uconnect® Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On
Your Faceplate

Uconnect® 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Buttons On Your Touchscreen

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into
manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again
will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when ON.
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Buttons On Your Touchscreen

4. AUTO Operation Button

Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen) adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
1. MAX A/C Button
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi- Operation” for more information.
nates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413

5. Front Defrost Button

CAUTION!

Press to change the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON.
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing this function
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the
front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will
return the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster (if
equipped) and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Button slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Press the button on the faceplate for warmer NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and automatically exit Sync.
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar 9. SYNC
towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
warmer temperature settings.
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
automatically exit Sync.
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
(Uconnect® 8.4)
7. Passenger Temperature
(Uconnect® 8.4)

Control

Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Press the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415

10. Blower Control

11. Modes

The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
The blower speed increases as you turn the knob clock- adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
wise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located adjacent to the air vanes to
Buttons On Your Touchscreen
shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting outlets.
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Knob On Your Faceplate

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Bi-Level Mode

12. Climate Control OFF Button

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and Press this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed 13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
(Uconnect® 8.4)
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conProvides the driver with independent temperature conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and trol. Press the button on the faceplate for cooler temperawarmer air from the floor outlets.
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
• Floor Mode

button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the
blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperaAir comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
ture settings.
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
• Mix Mode
time.
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect® 8.4)
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
Provides the driver with independent temperature consnowy conditions.
trol. Press the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417

the button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, push the A/C
temperature settings.
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
time.
NOTE:
15. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 5.0)
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
needed.
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem- • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperaexpected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lotures.
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
Climate Control Functions
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
A/C (Air Conditioning)
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

recirculation LED will illuminate the button on your
touchscreen and the button on your faceplate when either
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforbutton is selected. Push either button on your touchmance.
screen or button on your faceplate a second time to turn
Press to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air
The button on the touchscreen illuminates when MAX into the vehicle.
A/C is ON.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
adjusted to desired user settings. Pushing other settings feature may be unavailable (recirculation button on
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could
selected setting and cause MAX A/C to exit.
create fogging on the inside of the windshield. On
systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation
Recirculation Control
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled autoWhen outside air contains smoke, odors, or matically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in
you may wish to recirculate interior air by the control button to blink and then turn off.
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The
MAX A/C

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
1. Push the AUTO button on your faceplate or the button
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
on your touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature
comfort as quickly as possible.
Control (ATC) Panel.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pasfeature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons. Once
this section of the manual.
the desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level. To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
Manual Operation Override
system to function automatically.
Automatic Operation

The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) is recommended.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually Winter Operation
selected in Manual operation.
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perforNOTE: Each of these features operates independently mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functionfrom each other. If any feature is controlled manually, ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concentemperature control will continue to operate automati- tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
cally.
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
Operating Tips
during Winter months is not recommended because it
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for may cause window fogging.
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421

NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in
fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure Outside Air Intake
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
Window Fogging
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake
on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear is clear of ice, slush and snow.
Vacation/Storage

the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase A/C Air Filter
the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation
The climate control system filters outside air containing
mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
occur.
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423

Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect®
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0
or 8.4A/8.4AN system.

Uconnect® 5.0

Key Features:
• 5” touchscreen
• Three buttons on either side of the display

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect® system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect® 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect® 8.4A system.
Uconnect® 8.4AN

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425

4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.

Uconnect® Voice Command
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For all radios: Push To Begin Radio or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN only: Push to begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
3 — Push To End Call

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button

. After the beep, sayѧ

• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Uconnect® 5.0

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427

Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio® stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio® trial
required.)
Push the VR button

. After the beep, sayѧ

• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN

TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you
with a list of commands.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Uconnect® 5.0 Radio

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Radio

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429

TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth®
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
song and genre information is displayed.
available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Media

. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.

• Change source to Bluetooth®
• Change source to iPod®
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect® 5.0 Media

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
. After the beep, say one of
Push the Phone button
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Media

• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431

TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the
and say “Call,” then pronounce the
Phone button
name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When
a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Phone

Uconnect® 5.0 Phone
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push
and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
. After the beep, say: “Reply”
the Phone button

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
of
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.

TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep, tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advanrepeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
system prompts.
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Yes.
Stuck in Traffic.
See you later.
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsStart without
No.
I’ll be Late.
free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
me.
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
Okay.
Where are you? I will be minutes
Are you there
Call me.
late.
yet?
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433

Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Set temperature to 70 degrees
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees

TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time
and become more productive when you know exactly
how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is
optional on the Uconnect® 8.4A system. See your dealer
to activate navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
the beep, say:

. After

• For the 8.4A Uconnect® System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: “Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
After the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435

Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN)

Stolen Vehicle Assistance

An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.

Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp® Search
Voice Texting

Roadside Assistance Call
*Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped veWi-Fi Hotspot***
hicles purchased within the continental United States and
Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is **If vehicle is equipped.
available; see coverage map for details.
***Extra charges apply.
9-1-1 Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the 8.4-inch
touchscreen.
2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to
the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect® Registration.
3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and
confirm your personal email address. Then press
Send.
4. Check your personal inbox for an email from
Uconnect® Access.
5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and
complete the easy online registration process to create
a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to
your vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Uconnect® Registration 8.4A/8.4AN

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437

Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible
Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do is:
Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the 1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to
App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually
your Mopar® Owner Connect account at
any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with
MoparOwnerConnect.com
factory-installed Remote Start.)
2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone
number to receive a link to download the App on your
mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and
search for the Uconnect® Access App.
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)

3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect
user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is
then connected to your mobile device.

Mobile App
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TIP:

Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)

1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After • Not compatible with iPhone®.
the beep, say the following command: “Send mes• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
sage to John Smith”
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
illuminated to use the feature.
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect®
Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN)
to process your message.
3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect®
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have
a compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your
voice to send a personalized text message.

Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use
your voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “All Apps” button on the touchscreen.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439

3. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
4. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touch, then say: “YELP
screen, push the VR button
search.”
5. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect® the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect® to find.

TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
Yelp®

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
SiriusXM Travel Link™

• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441

Additional Information

Uconnect® System Support:

© 2014 Chrysler Group LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of Chrysler Group LLC.
Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM
Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks
are registered trademarks of Yelp.

• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400

DriveUconnect.com
DriveUconnect.ca

• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET
Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET
Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241.
Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when
you call.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or
−29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
AUTOSTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . .453
▫ To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . .455

▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . .455

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450

▫ System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455

▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .456
䡵 STOP/START SYSTEM — 2.4L ENGINE . . . . . . .451 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

444 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .459 䡵 ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB) . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .460

▫ Auto Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479

▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461

▫ Safehold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480

䡵 PADDLE SHIFT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .468

▫ Brake Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
䡵 ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .470 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .482
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .471

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .482

▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .485

▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471

▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .485

䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .472

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486

▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472

▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .487

▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472

▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490

䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474

▫ Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 445

▫ Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491

▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508

▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491

▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .510

䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .499
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .504
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .507
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507

▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .516
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .518
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .519
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

446 STARTING AND OPERATING

䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .532
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .535
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537

▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .542
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 447

▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .545
▫ Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545

▫ Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

448 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING PROCEDURES

WARNING! (Continued)

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 449

within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition switch to the Extended Park Starting
LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
has not been started or driven for at least 35 days.
Tip Start Feature
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
Cycle the ignition switch to START position and release it
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself 2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts.
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this 3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the
occurs, cycle the ignition switch to the LOCK position,
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
procedure.
Extended Park Starting procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)

4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
the procedure.
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

450 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

WARNING! (Continued)

To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.

• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 451

With Tip Start

After Starting

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
⬙Normal Starting⬙, “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ and ⬙Extended Park Starting⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To
clear any excess fuel, press the accelerator pedal all the
way to the floor and hold it. Then, cycle the ignition
switch to the START position and release it as soon as the
starter engages. The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the
accelerator pedal, cycle the ignition to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.

The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.

CAUTION!

The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. It will remain in STOP/START
NOT READY until you drive forward with a vehicle
speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the

To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.

STOP/START SYSTEM — 2.4L ENGINE
The Stop/Start function is developed to save fuel and
reduce emissions. The system will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions
are met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the
accelerator pedal on an automatic transmission will start
the engine.
Automatic Mode

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

452 STARTING AND OPERATING

system will go into STOP/START READY and if all other The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
conditions are met, can go into a STOP/START AU- the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate
indicating you are in Autostop. While in Autostop, the
TOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
Climate Controls system may automatically adjust airflow
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
to maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will be
Occur:
maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
AUTOSTOP
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID) within the Stop/ Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
Start section. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further system may be viewed in the EVIC/DID Stop/Start Screen.
In the following situations the engine will not stop:
information.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.

• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.

• The shifter must be in DRIVE or NEUTRAL and the • Driver’s door is not closed.
brake pedal depressed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 453

• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.

Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:

• The vehicle is on a steep grade.

• Fuel level.

• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept- • Accelerator pedal input.
able cabin temperature has not been achieved.
• Engine temp too high.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
speed.
times without the STOP/START system going into a
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature. STOP/START READY state under more extreme conditions of the items listed above.
• Battery charge is low.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
• The transmission is not in DRIVE or NEUTRAL.
While in DRIVE, the engine will start when the brake
• Hood is open.
pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. The
transmission will automatically re-engage upon engine
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
restart. During this transition the brakes will hold the
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
vehicle to avoid undesired vehicle movement.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

454 STARTING AND OPERATING

Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto- Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric
matically While In Autostop Mode:
Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
• The transmission selector is moved from DRIVE to • The driver door is open and brake pedal released.
REVERSE.
• The driver door is open and the driver seat belt is
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
unbuckled.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.

• The engine hood has been opened.

• Battery voltage drops too low.

• A STOP/START system error occurs.

• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the engine off,
the engine may require a manual restart and the electric
applications).
park brake may require a manual release (depress brake
• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
pedal and press Electric Park Brake switch). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or
• The emissions system requires it.
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 455

To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
START system) the engine will not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an
ON condition every time the key is turned off and
back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Press the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction

If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in STOP/START SYSTEM” message will appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
STOP/START OFF Switch

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

456 STARTING AND OPERATING

Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Dis- The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
play (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps
below to properly use the engine block heater:
for further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message ap- 1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the drivpears in the EVIC/DID, have the system checked by your
er’s side headlamp).
authorized dealer.
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in
place.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits 3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet 4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
driver’s side headlamp.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 457

NOTE:

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
are available from your authorized MOPAR® dealer.
• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
engine.

WARNING!

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

458 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 459

Key Ignition Park Interlock

WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in
the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake
pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into
shifting out of PARK.
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

460 STARTING AND OPERATING

Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The transmission gear range (PRNDL/S) is displayed both above the
gear selector and in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or the Driver Information Display (DID).
To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector.
Push down on the gear selector and then rotate it, to
access the L or S position. You must also press the brake
pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to
⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙ in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as
PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
Standard Shifter
The standard transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions.
Using the LOW position manually downshifts the transmission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 461

Premium Shifter with Shift Paddles
The premium transmission gear selector (with manual
shift paddles mounted on the steering wheel) provides
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift
positions. Manual shifts can be made using the shift
paddles (refer to ⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙ in this section).
Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or
SPORT position will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
Shift Lever
selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position Gear Ranges
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
be completed.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

462 STARTING AND OPERATING

PARK (P)

WARNING!

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 463

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

464 STARTING AND OPERATING

REVERSE (R)

CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicator should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission
gear position display and verify that it indicates the
PARK position.

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 465

CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.

winds), use the shift paddles (if equipped, refer to
⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙ in this section for further information) or the LOW range (if equipped) to select a lower
gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range
will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

If the transmission operating temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller may
modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine
DRIVE (D)
torque, and/or expand the range of torque converter
This range should be used for most city and highway clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down- damage due to overheating.
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the ⬙TransmisDRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris- sion Temperature Warning Light⬙ will illuminate, a warning message will appear in the EVIC/DID and the
tics under all normal operating conditions.
transmission may operate differently until the transmisWhen frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as sion cools down.
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

466 STARTING AND OPERATING

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
Normal operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
SPORT (S) — IF EQUIPPED
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power. To
access SPORT mode, push down on the gear selector and
rotate it fully clockwise.

LOW (L) — IF EQUIPPED
Use this range for engine braking when descending very
steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downshift for increased engine braking. To access the LOW
position, push down on the gear selector and rotate it
fully clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 467

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomcan be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
following steps:
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
1. Stop the vehicle.
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, dealer service is required.
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
Torque Converter Clutch
3. Press and hold the ignition switch until the engine A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
turns OFF.
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
5. Restart the engine.
different feeling or response during normal operation in
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
operation.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

468 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles
[2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when
cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will
function normally once the transmission is sufficiently
warm.

Operation

When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it
will operate automatically, shifting between the nine
available gears. To activate Paddle Shift mode, simply tap
one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-)
while in DRIVE or SPORT mode. Tapping (-) to enter
Paddle Shift mode will downshift the transmission to the
next lower gear, while using (+) to enter Paddle Shift
mode will retain the current gear. When Paddle Shift is
PADDLE SHIFT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
active, the current transmission gear is displayed in the
Paddle Shift mode is a driver-interactive transmission instrument cluster.
feature providing manual shift control, giving you more
control of the vehicle. Paddle Shift allows you to maxi- In Paddle Shift mode, the transmission will shift up or
mize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving and many other situations.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 469

result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
below.

(to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear. Tapping the (+) paddle (at a stop) will allow
starting in second gear. After a stop, the driver should
manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle
accelerates.

• If Paddle Shift is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached. Lack of accelerator • If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to
automatic operation.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• If Paddle Shift is engaged while in SPORT mode, the
transmission will remain in the selected gear even
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the
when maximum engine speed is reached (except the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
transmission will upshift automatically from 1st to 2nd
speed.
gear at wide open throttle, if necessary). Otherwise,
the transmission will upshift only when commanded • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
Paddle Shift mode is enabled.
by the driver.
• In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop
fault or overheat condition is detected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

470 STARTING AND OPERATING

To disengage Paddle Shift mode, press and hold the (+)
shift paddle until “D” or “S” is once again indicated in
the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of Paddle
Shift mode at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.

WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive
(AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving

conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.

CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 471

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

Traction

Acceleration

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.

1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.

WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).

2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

472 STARTING AND OPERATING

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Shallow Standing Water

Driving through water more than a few inches/ Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
and Warnings before doing so.
Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!

WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 473

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.

• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

474 STARTING AND OPERATING

POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing
assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
manually.

WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.

If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR
⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon
are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
(EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFORMANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and an icon are
displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that
extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which
caused an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull
over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 475

(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under- The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
NOTE:
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
You can engage the parking brake in two ways;
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial • Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feaduring parking maneuvers.
ture in the customer programmable features section of
the Uconnect® settings.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
The parking brake switch is located in the center console.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Parking Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the parking brake more
convenient and useful.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

476 STARTING AND OPERATING

on the brake pedal while you apply the parking brake,
you may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement. The parking brake can be applied even when the
ignition switch if OFF, however, it can only be released
when the ignition switch in the RUN position.
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extinguish
upon releasing the switch.

Electric Parking Brake Switch

To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the
switch momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring
sound from the back of the vehicle while the parking
brake engages. Once the parking brake is fully engaged,
the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and
an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is

If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the transmission is placed into PARK. Once the park brake is engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument
cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a
small amount of brake pedal movement while the parking brake is engaging.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 477

NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the
parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
PARK. The parking brake should always be applied
switch must be in the RUN position. Push on the brake
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
pedal, then push the parking brake switch down momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from the
WARNING!
back of the car while the parking brake disengages. You
may also notice a small amount of movement in the brake • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disengaged, The
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the
fully when parked to guard against vehicle moveLED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
ment and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
The parking brake will release automatically when the
ignition is cycled to the RUN position, the transmission is
in DRIVE or REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled,
and an attempt is made to drive away by pressing the
accelerator pedal.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

478 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
• Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to slow
the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake
system.

CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 479

If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion,
maintain upward pressure on the electric parking brake
switch for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE
warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime
will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.

Auto Park Brake
The electric park brake can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park
Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selection
through the customer programmable features section of
the Uconnect® Settings.

To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
complete stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle
reaches approximately 3 mph, the parking brake will
remain engaged.

Any single auto park brake application can be bypassed
by pressing the EPB switch to the release position while
the transmission is placed in PARK. This bypass can be
reset by cycling the ignition off and back on again, or by
driving the vehicle up to at least 12 mph (20Km/h), or by
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric going to the personal setting menu and turning the Auto
Parking Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will Park Brake function OFF and then back ON again.
illuminate. This may be accompanied by the BRAKE
warning lamp flashing. In this case, urgent service of the
electric parking brake system is required. Do not rely on
the parking brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

480 STARTING AND OPERATING

Safehold

Brake Service Mode

Safehold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake
System that will engage the park brake automatically if
the vehicle is left unsecured. If the automatic transmission is not in PARK, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver
door is open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no
attempt to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal,
the park brake will automatically engage to prevent the
vehicle from rolling.

We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
service.

Safehold can be temporarily bypassed by pressing the
Electric Park Brake Switch to the release position while
the driver door is open. Once manually bypassed, Safehold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position and back to ON again.

When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the electric parking brake system, this
can only be done after retracting the Electric Parking
Brake actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be
done easily by entering the Brake Service Mode through
EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center), Driver
Information Display (DID) or the Uconnect® Settings in
your vehicle. This menu based system will guide you
through the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in
order to perform rear brake service.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 481

Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
to be activated:
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
• The parking brake must be unapplied.
• The transmission must be in Park or Neutral.

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

While in service mode, the Electric Parking Brake fault
lamp will flash continuously while the ignition switch is
ON.
BRAKE SYSTEM
When brake service work is complete, the following steps Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal operation:
normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
• Apply the Electric Parking Brake Switch.
Warning Light.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

482 STARTING AND OPERATING

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system. This system includes Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction
Control System (TCS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions. Your vehicle is also equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB) and Rain Brake Support (RBS)

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.

WARNING!
• Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 483

WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is cycled to the ON position, have the bulb
repaired as soon as possible.

If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” remain on, the Anti-Lock Brake
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors (ABS) and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will come Systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS
on when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON system is required. See your authorized dealer.
position and may stay on for as long as four

seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

484 STARTING AND OPERATING

When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related
of the stop.
motor noises. These noises are the system performing its These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working
properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is
WARNING!
started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
stopping conditions. ABS inducing conditions can in- electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interferdebris, or panic stops.
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
You also may experience the following when the brake capability. Installation of such equipment should be
system goes into anti-lock:
performed by qualified professionals.
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
short time after the stop).
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
accurate signals for the computer.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 485

Traction Control System (TCS)

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than
the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode.
Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this
section of this manual.

This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

486 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.

WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 487

WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.

path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual

WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

488 STARTING AND OPERATING

Partial Off

WARNING! (Continued)
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes:
Full On

This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch (located in the lower switch bank above the
heater/air conditioning controls) or by shifting to “S” (if
equipped). When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion
of ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in the
TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability features of ESC function normally, with the exception of
engine power reduction. This mode is intended to be
used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction.

This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode. switch or by shifting out of “S” (if equipped). This will
This mode should be used for almost all driving situa- restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
tions. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for
specific reasons as noted below.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 489

WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
ESC Off Switch
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situaswitch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC on again by momentarily
operation.
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

490 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backThe HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
WARNING!
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
the intended direction of travel.
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
HSA Activation Criteria
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
activate:
Hill Start Assist (HSA)

• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 491

HSA Off

Rain Brake Support

If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done in
the Uconnect® settings. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings⬙ in
⬙Understanding Your Instrument Panel⬙ for further information.

Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
Ready Alert Braking
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
reach full braking during emergency braking situations. no driver interaction is required.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
ESC OFF Indicator Light
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

492 STARTING AND OPERATING

malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this NOTE:
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mospeeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authomentarily each time the ignition switch is cycled ON.
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was cycled off previously.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
that caused the ESC activation.
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
off.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 493

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

NOTE:

Tire Markings

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

494 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 495

EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

496 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 497

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

498 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Maximum Inflation Pressure

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard

Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 499

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.

5
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

500 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire And Loading Information Placard

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 501

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
spare tires.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

502 STARTING AND OPERATING

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 503

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

504 STARTING AND OPERATING

Safety

WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability

WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

• Economy

(Continued)

• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 505

Economy

WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

Under-inflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE:
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

506 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
inflated.
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. temperature changes.

CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 507

inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
Radial Ply Tires
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
WARNING!
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alequipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
combine them with other types of tires.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

508 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Repair

Tire Types

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. For more information, contact a authorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the “all
season” designation or “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 509

Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may Snow Tires
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
WARNING!
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

510 STARTING AND OPERATING

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 511

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You
can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare
tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding
the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

512 STARTING AND OPERATING

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
WARNING!
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Inspare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
first opportunity.
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
Full Size Spare — If Equipped

Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as

your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 513

Tire Spinning

Tread Wear Indicators

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

514 STARTING AND OPERATING

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Distance driven
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
becomes 1/16” (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle mainto “Replacement Tires” in this section for further infortenance schedule is highly recommended.
mation.

WARNING!

Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.

• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace- exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
ment.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 515

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manuthose of the original wheels.
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Replacement Tires

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

516 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage:
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 517

• Install on front tires only.
• For a 215/55R17 tire on a 17 x 7.0J x 41mm wheel, use
of a snow traction device with a maximum projection
of 9 mm beyond the tire profile is recommended.

WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

518 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
unequal rates.
reversed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 519

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.

Tire Rotation

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

520 STARTING AND OPERATING

also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres- need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
sure.
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
The system will automatically update and the “Tire
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informapressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn tion.
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warncold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 521

but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

522 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.

• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
NOTE:
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitorand maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
ing Telltale Light.”
failure or condition.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
while adjusting your tire pressure.
the tire.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 523

Base System

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument
cluster, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will be displayed and
readings to the receiver module.
a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
and to maintain the proper pressure.
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
The TPMS consists of the following components:
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
• Receiver Module
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

524 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
TPMS sensors.
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
that affects radio wave signals.
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
this information.
housings.
Service TPMS Warning
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare
also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The 1. The matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be
when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
monitored by the TPMS.
can occur due to any of the following:
2. If you install the matching full-size spare in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 525

Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” and
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ messages will turn on upon the next
ignition cycle.

sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” and ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ messages will turn on
upon the next ignition cycle.

3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash
(24 km/h) will turn off the “TPMS Telltale Light,” as
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound
and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-Matching Full
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size spare 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor.
or non-matching full size spare, the TPMS will update
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
automatically and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn
the spare tire.
off, as long as no tire pressure is below the low2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

526 STARTING AND OPERATING

Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.

The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The full
size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires.
A spare with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will
not cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to
illuminate or the chime to sound when it is stored in the
spare tire location. However, it will cause a “SPARE LOW
PRESSURE” message to display in the DID.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
four active road tires. In addition, the Driver Information
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, Display (DID) will display an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).
the low tire pressure values in a different color.
• Receiver Module

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 527

update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
DID will return to their original color, and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
SERVICE TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the DID will display a
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
⬙SERVICE SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
different color in the DID graphic) to the vehicle’s received.
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

528 STARTING AND OPERATING

message will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, pro5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
viding the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE SYSTEM

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 529

4. The DID will display a graphic showing the tire
pressure value in the same color as the other pressure
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
values in place of the different color low tire pressure
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be
value. The DID will also display a “SPARE LOW
monitored by the TPMS.
PRESSURE” message to remind you to service the flat
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
tire.
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
Vehicles With Compact Spare
limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale
Light” will turn on upon the next ignition cycle. In 1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moniaddition, the DID will display an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure
value in a different color.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
ing limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the “TPMS
15 mph (24 km/h) the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn
OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the lowTelltale Light” will remain on and a chime will sound.
In addition, the graphic in the DID will still display a
pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
different color pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
tires.
message.
Vehicles With Full-Size Spare

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

530 STARTING AND OPERATING

low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
TPMS to receive this information.
solid. In addition, the DID will display a “SERVICE
SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display
General Information
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off following conditions:
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID
will display a “SERVICE SYSTEM” message for five • This device may not cause harmful interference.
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the • This device must accept any interference received,
pressure value.
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the following licenses:
“TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off and the graphic in
KR55WY9012
the DID will display a new pressure value instead of United States
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the Canada
7812D-5WY9012
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 531

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.

All engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not Reformulated Gasoline
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
engines.
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are speyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imhigh speeds can cause damage and immediate service is prove air quality.
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoas hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi- line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will proence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
before considering service for the vehicle.
fuel system components.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

532 STARTING AND OPERATING

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasogenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
may be used in your vehicle.
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 533

To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
E-85 perform the following:
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
and California reformulated gasoline.
engine controller memory.
Materials Added To Fuel
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
exposure to E-85 fuel.
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
MMT In Gasoline
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) conditions and they would result in additional cost.
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline fuel.
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

534 STARTING AND OPERATING

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION! (Continued)

CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.

• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 535

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

536 STARTING AND OPERATING

E-85 Fuel Cap

E-85 Badge

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 537

For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternating between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recomE-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
mended.
15% unleaded gasoline.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)

WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.

• You do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling.
• You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.

Fuel Requirements

NOTE:
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

538 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.

Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 539

Replacement Parts

ADDING FUEL

Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.

The fuel filler cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on
the passenger side of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is
lost or damaged, be sure the replacement fuel filler cap
has been designed for use with this vehicle.

CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.

Maintenance

CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

540 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.

• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
1. Put the vehicle in park and switch the ignition off.
2. Press the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door (9
o’clock position) and release to open.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 541

4. After you have stopped pumping fuel, remove the fuel
filler nozzle and replace the fuel filler cap.
5. To close the fuel filler door, press the center-rear edge
(9 o’clock position) of the fuel filler door and then
release. The fuel filler door will latch closed.
NOTE:
• In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
filler door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on
the fuel filler door around the perimeter to break the
ice build up.
Fuel Filler Door and Fuel Filler Cap Tether Hook
1 — Fuel Filler Door Actuator
2 — Fuel Filler Cap Tether Hook

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.

• Tighten the fuel filler cap about one quarter turn until
you hear one click. This is an indication that the fuel
3. Remove the fuel filler cap and hang fuel filler cap by
filler cap is properly tightened.
tether on fuel fill door to prevent damage to body side.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

542 STARTING AND OPERATING

• If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL VEHICLE LOADING
will come on. Be sure the fuel filler cap is tightened
Certification Label
every time the vehicle is refueled.
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety AdminLoose Fuel Filler Cap Message
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
Information (EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a bottom of the label is your VIN.
“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard
Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
further information.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 543

Payload

Rim Size

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the listed.
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Inflation Pressure
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
Curb Weight
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

544 STARTING AND OPERATING

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
the brakes operate.
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Loading

CAUTION!

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh- way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is your vehicle.
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the TRAILER TOWING
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 545

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)

4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

5. Release the parking brake.

Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing for front-wheel drive models is
allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.

CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in
PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

546 STARTING AND OPERATING

Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Models
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the power transfer
unit.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.

CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .549 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .562
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .549

▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .563

䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550

▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565

▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .554
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .557

▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .584

▫ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .586

▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models . . . . . . . . .585

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 549

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank below the radio screen.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
may wear down your battery.
engine cooling system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

550 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque

**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size

100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m)

M12 x 1.25

WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
19 mm

**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 551

6
Wheel Mounting Surface

Torque Patterns

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

552 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Tire Service Kit Storage

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.

The Tire Service Kit is stowed under an access cover in
the trunk.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.

TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Pull Strap
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 553

3. Remove the fastener securing the Tire Service Kit.

4. Remove Tire Service Kit.

6
Tire Service Kit Fastener

Tire Service Kit

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

554 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Tire Service Kit Components And Operation

Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.

Tire Service Kit Components

1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button

5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on
bottom side of Tire Service Kit)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 555

from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
use. Always replace these components immediately at
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼”
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
(6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, • Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

556 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4” (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.

• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye,
and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with
plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or
skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there
is any contact with clothing.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 557

WARNING! (Continued)
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.

on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the ignition.
4. Set the parking brake.

Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:

(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Sealant Mode position.
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

558 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the tire.
valve stem.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.

Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Press the Power
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.

2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
available. Make sure the engine is running before
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 559

NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air pressure within 15 minutes:
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomflowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). mended inflation pressure before continuing.
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi- 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instruoperate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
ment panel.
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”

CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.

WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.

(D) Drive Vehicle:

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561

3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
Gauge (3).
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
service center.
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement.”
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authoopening.
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla- using the Tire Service Kit.
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).

(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).

2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
vehicle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 563

Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage

WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.

The jack, wheel chocks and spare tire are stowed under
an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access
the jack, wheel chocks and spare tire.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

564 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Pull Strap

Jack And Spare Tire Fastener

3. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.

4. Remove the scissors jack, wheel bolt wrench and
wheel chocks from the spare wheel as an assembly.
Remove the chocks from the jack assembly. Turn the
jack screw to the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench,
and remove the wrench from the jack assembly.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 565

5. Remove the spare tire.

WARNING!

WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.

1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the 5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery 6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
areas.
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
tire, chock the left rear wheel. Place
both chocks under the tire.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

566 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Jacking Instructions

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 567

Jack Warning Label

CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.

6
Jacking Locations

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

568 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the notched lift area that is
closest to the flat tire.

Removing Jack Handle From Jack

2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Front Body Flange

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 569

6
Rear Body Flange

Front Body Flange Engaged

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Rear Body Flange Engaged

Front Jacking Location

5. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the
jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange, centering the jack saddle between the locating notches on the
sill flange.
6. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571

WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
7. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
8. Mount the spare tire.

CAUTION!
Rear Jacking Location

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.

Mounting Spare Tire

9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573

10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.

WARNING!

11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased hard stop could endanger the occupants of the veleverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
to “Torque Specifications” in this section for proper repaired or replaced immediately.
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tight- Road Tire Installation
ness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
your authorized dealer or at a service station.
12. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel 1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem- 2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Securely stow
wheel covers, install two wheel bolts on the wheel
the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire. Release the
which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the
parking brake before driving the vehicle.
wheel bolts with the threaded end of the bolt toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

snapping the cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not
use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the wheel bolts.

WARNING!

Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel bolt

4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Road Wheel

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.

6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575

“Torque Specifications” in this section for proper lug
bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.

7. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
assembly using the means provided. Release the parkhandle counterclockwise.
ing brake before driving the vehicle.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
8. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
properly seated against the wheel.
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
Road Tire Installation
“Torque Specifications” in this section for the proper
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
authorized dealer or service station.
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the wheel bolts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
assembly using the means provided. Release the parking brake before driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.

CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.

WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Preparations For Jump-Start
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577

WARNING!

1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Negative Battery Post

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.

3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579

2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
you should have the battery and charging system instart the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
spected at your authorized dealer.
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION! (Continued)
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.

Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.

NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further inforIf your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
CAUTION!
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the enachieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581

CAUTION!

WARNING! (Continued)

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).

explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
(Continued)

MANUAL PARK RELEASE

WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis- 2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
Manual Park Release access cover, which is undera Manual Park Release is available.
neath the rubber storage bin liner in the center console
pass-through.
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

Manual Park Release Cover
Manual Park Release location

3. Unsnap the tether from the Manual Park Release lever,
and use it to pull the lever upwards.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583

6
Manual Park Release Tether

Locked Position

4. Pull the tether to rotate the lever up and rearward, 5. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
until it locks vertically in place. Verify that the Manual
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
Park Release lever is locked in the released position.
securely connected to a tow vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

To reset the Manual Park Release:

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

1. Pull the tether upwards to unlock the lever.

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.

2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down to its original position.
3. Re-install the access cover and the rubber storage bin
liner.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Flatbed

Wheel OFF the Ground
NONE
Rear
Front
ALL

FWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST METHOD

AWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- vehicles under tow must be observed.
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
position, not the ACC position.
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
wheels raised).
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
CAUTION!
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. DamCAUTION!
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
towing.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
wheels raised).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.

• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!
• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .589

▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598

䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .590

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598

䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .591

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .591

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .601

䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605

䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .594
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617

▫ Front Side Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644

▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619

▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645

䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . .626
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637

▫ Backup Lamps (Passenger Side) . . . . . . . . . . .646
▫ Backup Lamps (Driver Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
▫ Stop/Rear Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651

䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639

䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652

▫ Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps . . . . .639

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652

▫ Front Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L

7
1
2
3
4

— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
— Oil Fill Cap
— Brake Fluid Reservoir

5
6
7
8

—
—
—
—

Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Battery
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L

1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Oil Filter Access Cover
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

5
6
7
8

— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
— Engine Oil Fill
— Air Cleaner Filter

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

CAUTION!

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information (EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a
“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard
Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
not crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not start this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS

of a normal bulb check.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainteIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was Limited Warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
attempting any procedure yourself.
services determined by the engineers who designed your
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
penalties being assessed against you.
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.

regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding 1 quart (0.9 L) of oil when the reading is
at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at
the top of the safe zone on these engines.

CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.

Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Change Engine Oil

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
This symbol means that the oil has
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informabeen certified by the American
tion.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inmanufacturer only recommends
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
API Certified engine oils.
months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
MOPAR® SAE 0W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil®
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Comor Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tempartment” illustration in this section.
peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
grade for your engine.
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- Synthetic Engine Oils
ber should not be used.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomEngine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomMOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell are followed.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine

Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating Materials Added To Engine Oil
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addistarting and vehicle fuel economy.
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its Engine Oil Filter Selection
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
filters and are recommended.
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and Engine Air Cleaner Filter
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
your area.
maintenance intervals.
Engine Oil Filter

NOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road condiThe engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter tions” maintenance interval if applicable.
at every engine oil change.
NOTE: For best access to the oil filter, a drive on hoist
should be used instead of a chassis hoist.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599

Maintenance-Free Battery

WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601

Air Conditioner Maintenance

WARNING! (Continued)

For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.

• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped

the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
A/C Air Filter
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf —
If Equipped

WARNING!

Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.

The A/C air filter is located in front of the evaporator on
the lower right of center console. Perform the following
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydroprocedure to replace the filter:
fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product 1. Remove the passenger side console closeout cover.
with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage
the front retaining tab and remove the cover.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603

Console Closeout Panel

Hush Panel

3. Pull down the passenger hush panel under the dash 4. Remove the filter door by pushing down the tab on the
panel
top of the door to release the cover then rotate the door
out and lift up.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Air Filter Cover Location

A/C Air Filter

5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of 6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
the housing. Take note of the air filter position indicaindicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
tors.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605

CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.

the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

7. Install the passenger side hush panel under the dash
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
panel and console closeout.
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
maintenance intervals.
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Body Lubrication

Windshield Wiper Blades

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.

windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend- in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
performance of blades may be present with chattering, rating information can be found on most washer fluid
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions containers.
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necesWARNING!
sary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with

Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607

Exhaust System

WARNING!

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.

WARNING! (Continued)
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

Engine Coolant Checks
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
Cooling System
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
WARNING!
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If down the face of the condenser.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
entire system for leaks.
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but needed to be added to the system please contact your
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for local authorized dealer.
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti- OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS-12106).
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

(Continued)

Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.

(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainthat meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing acdard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive NOTE:
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
Material Standard MS-12106.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could

lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
needed to be added to the system please contact your
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stanlocal authorized dealer.
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deiona authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613

Cooling System Pressure Cap

WARNING! (Continued)

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
WARNING!
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding spills immediately.
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Coolant Level

Points To Remember

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
a month.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antimaintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MSexpansion bottle must also be protected against freez12106 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
ing.
overfill.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are Brake System
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
for leaks.
system components should be inspected periodically.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) maintenance intervals.
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
WARNING!
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
should be checked when pads are replaced. However,
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617

WARNING! (Continued)

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.

CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use
of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
Fluid And Filter Changes
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
life of the vehicle.
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underRoutine fluid and filter changes are not required. How- body protection.
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
disassembled for any reason.
resistance built into your vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
and Tar Remover to remove.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
The most common causes are:
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
What Causes Corrosion?

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

CAUTION!

Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
open.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
Special Care

touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
the owner.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives
or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis
this is all that is required to maintain this finish.

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623

Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Clean interior trim with a damp cloth and MOPAR®
Total Clean or equivalent, and if necessary, follow with
MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent. Do not
use harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total
Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is
not required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breaknot use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
age than glass headlights.
scratch the elements.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and directly on the mirror.
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution folThe lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
lowed by rinsing.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
Glass Surfaces
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
rag.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Cleaning Headlights

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625

Seat Belt Maintenance

WARNING! (Continued)

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to FUSES
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.

WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt

WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.

The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses and relays. A label that identifies
each component is printed on the inside of the cover.

Power Distribution Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627

Cavity
F06
F07
F08
F09
F10
F11
F12
F13

Blade Fuse
–
–
25 Amp Clear
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red

Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

F14

10 Amp Red

–

F15
F16
F17

–
20 Amp Yellow
–

–
–
–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Not Used
Not Used
Engine Control Module (ECM) / Fuel Inj.
Not Used
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
Not Used
Brake Vacuum Pump – If Equipped
Engine Control Module (ECM) / VSM (Stop/
Start Only)
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) / Power
Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped / RDM /
Brake System Module (BSM) / Brake Pedal S.
Not Used
Powertrain / Ignition Coil
Not Used

628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F23

Blade Fuse
–
–
10 Amp Red
–
5 Amp Tan
70 Amp Tan
50 Amp Red

Cartridge Fuse
–
40 Amp Green
–
–
–
–
–

F24
F25B

–
20 Amp Yellow

–
–

F26
F27
F28
F29

–
–
15 Amp Blue
–

–
–
–
–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Not Used
Starter Solenoid
A/C Compressor Clutch
Not Used
Radiator Fan Enable
Body Controller Module (BCM) – Feed 2
Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #2 – If
Equipped With Stop/Start Engine Option
Not Used
Front Washer Pump – If Equipped with Stop/
Start Option
Not Used
Not Used
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Not Used

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629

Cavity
F30
F31
F32
F33
F34
F35
F36
F37
F38
F39
F40
F41

Blade Fuse
10 Amp Red
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
50 Amp Red
–
40 Amp Green
–
50 Amp Red

F41
F42

—
–

60 Amp Yellow
–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Engine Control Module (ECM) / EPS
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Radiator Fan PWM Controller
Not Used
HVAC Blower Motor
Not Used
Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #1 – If
Equipped With Stop/Start Engine Option
Body Controller Module (BCM) – Feed 1
Not Used

630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
F43
F44
F45
F46
F47
F48
F49
F50
F51
F52
F53
F54
F55

Blade Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red

Cartridge Fuse
–
–
30 Amp Pink
25 Amp Clear
–
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–

F56

15 Amp Blue

–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Fuel Pump Motor
Not Used
Passenger Door Module (PDM) – If Equipped
Sunroof – If Equipped
Not Used
Driver Door Module (DDM)
Power Inverter (115V A/C) – If Equipped
Windshield Wiper Smart Motor (WWSM)
Not Used
Not Used
Brake System Module BSM & Valves
Body Controller Module (BCM) – Feed 3
Blind Spot Sensors/Compass/Rearview
Camera – If Equipped
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) / RF Hub

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631

Cavity
F57
F58

Blade Fuse
–
10 Amp Red

Cartridge Fuse
–
–

F59
F60
F61
F62
F63
F64
F65

–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red

30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–

F66

15 Amp Blue

–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Not Used
Occupant Classification Module/Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #2 – If Equipped With
Stop/Start Engine Option
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)
Power Outlet – Center Console
Not Used
Not Used
Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
Heated Steering Wheel – If Equipped
In Car Temperature Sensor/Humidity Sensor/
Driver Assist System Module (DASM)/Park
Assist (PAM) – If Equipped With Stop/Start
Engine Option
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Electronic Climate Control (ECC)

632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
F67

Blade Fuse
10 Amp Red

Cartridge Fuse
–

F68
F69

–
10 Amp Red

–
–

F70

5 Amp Tan

–

F71

20 Amp Yellow

–

F72
F73
F74
F75
F76

10 Amp Red
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red

–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
In Car Temperature Sensor/Humidity Sensor/
Drivers Assist System Module (DASM)/Park
Assist (PAM) – If Equipped
Not Used
Gear Shift Module (GSM)/Active Grill Shutter
(AGS). – If Equipped / EPB SW
Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) – If Equipped
with Stop/Start Option
HID Headlamp Right – If Equipped with
Stop/Start Option
Heated Mirrors – If Equipped
Not Used
Rear Defroster/Defogger
Cigar Lighter
Drivers Window SW– If Equipped

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633

Cavity
F77
F78

Blade Fuse
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red

Cartridge Fuse
–
–

F79

10 Amp Red

–

F80
F81
F82
F83
F84
F85
F86

20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow

–
–
–
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
–
–

F87A

20 Amp Yellow

–

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
UCI Port/Brake Pedal Switch
Diagnostic Port/Steering Column Control
Module (SCCM)
Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Switch Bank/
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/EPB SW
Radio
Not Used
Not Used
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Left
Not Used
Horns – If Equipped With Stop/Start Engine
Option
HID Headlamp Left – If Equipped Stop/Start
Only

634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
F88

Blade Fuse
10 Amp Red

Cartridge Fuse
–

F89
F90
F91
F92
F93

–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
40 Amp Green

F94
F95

–
10 Amp Red

30 Amp Pink
–

F96
F97

10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red

–
–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Collision Mitigation Module (CMM)/
Electrochromatic Mirror/Haptic Lane Feedback Module (Half)/Humidity Sensor– If
Equipped
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Brake System Module (BSM) – Pump Motor –
If Equipped
Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Right
Electrochromatic Mirror/Rain/Pass. Window
SW/Power Outlet Console Illumination/
Sensor/Sunroof – If Equipped
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (Airbag)
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (Airbag)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635

Cavity
F98
F99
F100

Blade Fuse
25 Amp Clear
–
–

Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–

Description
Audio Amplifier – If Equipped
Not Used
Not Used

Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger compartment on the left side dash panel under the instrument panel.
Cavity
F13
F32
F36
F37
F38
F43

Blade Fuse
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
7.5 Amp Brown
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow

Description
Low Beam Left
Interior Lighting
Intrusion Module / Siren
Aux. Switch Bank Module (ASBM)
All Doors Lock/Unlock
Washer Pump Front
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
F48
F49
F51

Blade Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
7.5 Amp Brown
10 Amp Red

F53
F89
F91
F92
F93

7.5 Amp Brown
5 Amp Tan
5 Amp Tan
5 Amp Tan
10 Amp Red

Description
Horns
Lumbar Support
Driver Window Switch / Power Mirrors – If
Equipped
UCI Port (USB & AUX)
Trunk Lamp
Fog Lamp Front Left
Fog Lamp Front Right
Low Beam Right

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
You may:
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
VEHICLE STORAGE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637

REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Front Courtesy/Reading Lamp
Center Courtesy/Reading Lamp
Visor Vanity Lamp
Glove Box Lamp
Shift Indicator Lamp
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement.

Bulb Number
578/W5W
578/W5W
A6220
A6220
IKLE14140
579

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
HID (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
HIR2
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
PWY24W SV
W3W
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
H11
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
W21W
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
921
W5W

High Intensity Discharge Headlamp
Bi-Halogen Headlamp
Daytime Running Lamp
Front Turn Signal Lamp
Side Marker Lamp
Front Park Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
LED Front Fog Lamp
Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp
Stop/Turn Signal Lamp
Rear Tail/Side Marker Lamp
Backup Lamp
License Lamp

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639

NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmothe lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
WARNING!
accelerate the clearing process.
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID)
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electroHeadlamps — If Equipped
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge dealer for service.
BULB REPLACEMENT

light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source 1. Rotate the screw on the headlamp access door in the
yourself. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your
wheel liner to access headlamp assembly.
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Access Door

Headlamp Bulb Cap

2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the 4. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb socket assembly and
headlamp bulb cap.
rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
3. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb cap and rotate it
counterclockwise to unlock it.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641

Headlamp Bulb Socket

Headlamp Bulb

5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.

CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in
place.
7. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Lock headlamp access door in wheel liner.
Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the lamp assembly
on the passenger side of the vehicle.

Beauty Cover

3. Remove the brace by removing the four fasteners and
loosening the 5th inboard fastener.
2. Remove the beauty cover, by removing the 10 push
pins.
4. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket assembly
counterclockwise, and then remove the front turn
signal lamp assembly from the lamp housing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643

7. Install air cleaner filter housing, if removed.
8. Install brace, brace bolts and tighten as shown.

Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket

5. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.

7
Brace Bolt Tightening Sequence

6. Install the front turn signal lamp socket assembly into 9. Install beauty cover.
the housing, and rotate the front turn signal lamp
socket clockwise to lock it in place.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Front Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner wheel liner
and carefully peel back liner for access.

Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal

3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp socket
and replace with a new bulb.
4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp assembly
and rotate 1/4 turn clockwise to lock into place.
2. Firmly grasp the front side marker lamp socket and
rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise to remove it from the 5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install the
lamp assembly.
three fasteners.
Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645

3. Rotate the front fog lamp socket counterclockwise,
and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the
1. Remove the three fasteners from the lower closeout,
front fog lamp housing.
and peel down the lower closeout.
Front Fog Lamp

7
Front Fog Lamp Socket

Lower Closeout

2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to access the bulb.

4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Backup Lamps (Passenger Side)

CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.

1. Open trunk lid.
2. Remove the passenger side access cover.
3. Remove the inner trunk lid handle cover.

4. Remove the two screws and remove the inner trunk
5. Install the front fog lamp socket assembly into the into
lid handle.
the front fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector
NOTE: If necessary remove any additional inner deck lid
clockwise to lock it in place.
trim push pins to gain access.
6. Position the lower closeout panel in place and secure
5. Gently pull back the inner deck panel behind the trunk
with the three fasteners.
lid lamp housing to expose the backup lamp socket.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647

Inner Deck Panel

Backup Lamp Socket

6. Rotate the backup lamp socket counter clockwise 1/4 7. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
turn to remove the backup lamp socket from the trunk
replacement bulb.
lid lamp housing.
8. Install the backup lamp socket into the trunk lid lamp
housing.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

9. Rotate backup lamp socket clockwise 1/4 turn to lock
it into place.
10. Reposition the inner deck panel and secure with a
push pin if removed.
11. Install access cover.
Backup Lamps (Driver Side)
1. Open trunk lid.
2. Remove the drivers side access cover.
3. Remove inner deck lid support push pin.
Backup Lamp Socket

NOTE: If necessary remove any additional inner deck lid
5. Rotate the backup lamp socket counter clockwise 1/4
trim push pins to gain access.
turn to remove the backup lamp socket from the trunk
4. Gently pull back the inner deck panel behind the trunk
lid lamp housing.
lid lamp housing to expose the backup lamp socket.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
NOTE: passenger side shown the drivers side is similar.
replacement bulb.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649

7. Install the backup lamp socket into the trunk lid lamp
housing.
8. Rotate backup lamp socket clockwise 1/4 turn to lock
it into place.
9. Reposition the inner deck panel and secure with a
push pin if removed.
10. Install the access cover.
Stop/Rear Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the trunk lid.
Tail Lamp Beauty Cover
2. Remove the tail lamp housing beauty cover by grasping the top edge and pulling rearward to expose the 3. Remove the tail lamp housing bolts
tail lamp housing bolts.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

5. Rotate the stop/rear turn signal lamp socket 1/4 turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the tail lamp
housing.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
replacement bulb.
7. Install the bulb socket into the tail lamp housing and
rotate the bulb socket ¼ turn clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Install the tail lamp housing.
9. Install the tail lamp housing beauty cover.
Tail Lamp Bolts

License Plate Lamp

4. Pull the tail lamp housing directly rearward to dis- 1. Remove the screw of the license plate lamp assembly
and pull down on the license plate lamp assembly to
lodge the two out bored ball studs from the socket
remove.
fasteners.
NOTE: It may be necessary to use significant force to 2. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
replacement bulb.
remove the two out bored ball studs from the socket
fasteners to remove the tail lamp housing.
3. Install the license plate lamp assembly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651

FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L and 3.6L Engines
15.8 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
5.5 Quarts
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/
7.2 Quarts
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula)
3.6 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/
8.7 Quarts
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Metric
60 Liters
5.2 Liters
5.6 Liters
6.8 Liters

8.2 Liters

652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant

Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653

Component
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine

Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
87 Octane
87-89 Octane

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655

Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission

Brake Master Cylinder

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic
Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid,
SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only
recommended brake fluids.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660 N
C
E

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .658

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

658 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil
Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Oil Change Reset”
in “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or
⬙Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 659 M

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and
brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

M 660 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
T
E
N Mileage:
A
N
C Or Years:
E
Or Kilometers:
S
C
H Additional Inspections
E
D Inspect the CV joints.
U Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends,
L and replace if necessary.
E Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function.
S
8 Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter.
Replace spark plugs – 2.4L Engine **

X
X

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

X
X

Mileage:

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 661 M

Replace spark plugs – 3.6L Engine **
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.

X
X
X

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

M 662 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
WARNING!
N
T
E • You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
N
A
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
N
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
C
service job, take your vehicle to a competent meE
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667

▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .665

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .665 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .669
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .666

▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .669

▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .666

▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669

▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .670

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

664 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 665

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment

Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

666 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 247–9753
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 667

Mexico, D. F.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Service Contract

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).

In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

668 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.

WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 669

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
424–9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write
available from an authorized dealer. They are recomto: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
operating at its best.
also obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
MOPAR® PARTS

In Canada

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in roadsafety/
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

670 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 671

Call toll free at:

Treadwear

• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

672 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX

10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

674 INDEX

About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .182
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Air Bag
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Air Bag Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Air bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Front Passenger Knee Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Lighter Weight Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) . . . . . . . .66
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Air bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Air bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Air bag Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .598
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 675

Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .419
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .25
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

676 INDEX

Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .592
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 677

Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . .101
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . .100
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .94
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .89
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Using The Top Tether Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400

Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.306
.449
.511
.306
.277
.667
.613
.609
.611
.651
.614
.613
.610
.609
.614
.613
.613
.610
.619

678 INDEX

Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .34
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Key Fob Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Driver Information Display (DID)
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Driver Information Display (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Dipsticks
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 679

Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . .
Change Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EVIC Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .535
. . . .299
. . . .475
. . . .314
. . . .131
. . . .482
. . . .485
. . . .178
. . . .487
. . . .274
. . . .345
. . . .333
Setup
. . . .333
. . . .333

EVIC Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .592
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

680 INDEX

Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Fabric Care. . . . . . . . .
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . .
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . .
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . .
Fuel Requirements .
Maintenance . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.598
.421
.598
.598

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.538
.538
.535
.539

INDEX 681

Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . .
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Front Position Light . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.539
.538
.450
.306
.655
.651
.113

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.615
.595
.652
.164
.645
.152
.209
.580
.644
.531
.533

Clean Air . . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . .
Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
Gasoline . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . .
Requirements . . . . .
Specifications . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . .
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.531
.532
.539
.531
.329
.533
.532
.531
.531
.652
.651
.535
.625

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.281
.539
.531
.531

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

682 INDEX

Gauges
Coolant Temperature
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . .
General Information . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . .
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

..
..
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .166
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
.331
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
.329
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
.324
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
.331
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
.461
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
.400
.624 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
.542 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
.472 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .166
.549 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
.160 HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .281
.639
.624 Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
.161
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 683

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Front Courtesy Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter . . . . . . .21
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302

Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576

Key Fob
Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Additional Key Fobs . .
Programming Additional Transmitters
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . .
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . .
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.13
.24
.24
.18
.18
.25
.13
.24
.23
.15

. . . . . . . . .24
. . . . . . . . .36
. . . . . . . . .36

684 INDEX

.24 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
.36
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
.36
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
.36
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
.23
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
.23
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
.22
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
.12
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
.12
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .491
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Front Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Light Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . .
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passive Entry Programming . . . .
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlock From The Driver’s Side .
Unlock From The Passenger Side
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 685

High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .329
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .169
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .329
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .326

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.

.599
.594
.658
.329

686 INDEX

Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
MOPAR® Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532

Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 687

Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .500
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .299
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . .
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.

.507
.613
.399
.398
.397

688 INDEX

Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .18
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .398
Remote Starting
Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
EVIC Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 689

Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .55
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .58
BeltAlert® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . .60
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Engage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . . . .59
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .55
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

690 INDEX

Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
Shifting
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 691

Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .398

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .61
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tip Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and Loading Information Placard . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.331
.176
.419
.331
.176
.161
.449
.499

692 INDEX

Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . .
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.493
.113
.514
.504
.516
.562
.511
.504
.507
.506
.562
.514
.499
.349
.326
.671
.507
.515
.518

Safety . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators
Tire Safety Information .
Tire Service Kit . . . . . . .
To Open Hood . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind a
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . .
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic . . . . . . . .
Autostick . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
Motorhome
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.493
.494
.509
.563
.513
.513
.493
.552
.157
.544
.584
.545
.545
.471
.544
.457
.457
.468
.457

INDEX 693

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .281
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .25
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623

Uconnect®
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Uconnect® Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620

Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

694 INDEX

Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Auto Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Driver/Passenger Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . .41
Express Up And Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Rear Passenger Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Window Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2015 200

2015
OWNER’S MANUAL

Chrysler Group LLC
15UF-126-AC

Third Edition Rev 1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Printed in U.S.A.

200

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : No
Author                          : 3rd Edition Rev. 1
Create Date                     : 2014:07:20 13:29:15-04:00
Keywords                        : 1820668
Modify Date                     : 2015:06:03 09:58:53-05:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.6-c015 81.157285, 2014/12/12-00:43:15
Metadata Date                   : 2015:06:03 09:58:53-05:00
Creator Tool                    : Adobe InDesign CC 2014 (Macintosh)
Instance ID                     : uuid:52c2e093-efff-4c87-af7b-81bc82cb2011
Original Document ID            : xmp.did:B8BC9D61201E11688507CD34934C9F05
Document ID                     : xmp.id:89c963ea-381e-4c0b-a85b-ff1881e8d24f
Rendition Class                 : proof:pdf
Derived From Instance ID        : xmp.iid:b30bf682-03f8-45de-992e-8ac070e37aff
Derived From Document ID        : xmp.did:cba2d998-b659-4bff-a6e2-bdaf2e6bdffe
Derived From Original Document ID: xmp.did:B8BC9D61201E11688507CD34934C9F05
Derived From Rendition Class    : default
History Action                  : converted
History Parameters              : from application/x-indesign to application/pdf
History Software Agent          : Adobe InDesign CC 2014 (Macintosh)
History Changed                 : /
History When                    : 2014:07:20 13:29:15-04:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 2015 Chrysler 200 Owner's Manual
Description                     : 15UF-126-AC
Creator                         : 3rd Edition Rev. 1
Subject                         : 1820668
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 11.0
Trapped                         : False
Slug Family                     : Times
Slug Version                    : 6.1
Slug Outline File Size          : 0
Slug Kerning Checksum           : 63825
Slug Foundry                    : Apple Computer
Slug Font Kind                  : TrueType
Slug Checksum                   : 4011865787
Slug Post Script Name           : Times-Roman
Slug Font Sense 12 Checksum     : 4011865787
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 698

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

2015 Chrysler 200 Owner's Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation